SMC Networks SMC6752AL2 Switch User manual

page 3-34) used to trigger alert messages. All events at this level or

4-249

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: dhcp.

Console#

4-251

4-252

Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.

Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available.

CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#

4-251

3-20

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

Managing Firmware

You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server, or copy files to and from switch units in a stack. By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version. You must specify the method of file transfer, along with the file type and file names as required.

Command Attributes

• File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:

- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.

- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.

- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.

- file to unit

– Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.

- unit to file

– Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.

• File Name – The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,

“.”, “-”, “_”)

Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted.

1. These operations are not supported for this switch.

3-21

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Downloading System Software from a Server

When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.

Web –Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to “opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

Figure 3-8 Operation Code Image File Transfer

3-22

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

If you download to a new destination file, go to the System/File/Set

Start-Up menu, mark the operation code file used at startup, and click

Apply. To start the new firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

Figure 3-9 Select Start-Up Operation File

To delete a file select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted

Figure 3-10 Deleting Files

3-23

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, select “opcode” as the file type, then enter the source and destination file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the system, and then restart the switch.

To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system.

Console#copy tftp file

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2

Source file name: V2.2.6.3.bix

Destination file name: V2263

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system opcode:V2263

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

4-87

4-93

4-30

Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings

You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack. The configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.

Command Attributes

• File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:

- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.

- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.

- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.

- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.

- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.

- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.

3-24

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.

- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.

- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.

- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.

- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.

- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.

- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.

- file to unit

– Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.

- unit to file

– Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.

• File Name — The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,

“.”, “-”, “_”)

Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space.

2. These operations are not supported for this switch.

3-25

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server

You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.

Web – Click System, File, Copy. Select “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file” and enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the file to download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply.

Figure 3-11 Copy Configuration Settings

3-26

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

Note that you can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by using the System/File/Set Start-Up page.

Figure 3-12 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings

CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server, set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19

Source configuration file name: config-1

Startup configuration file name [] : startup

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

4-87

Console#reload

To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the

boot system command and then restart the switch.

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system config: startup

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

4-93

4-30

3-27

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Console Port Settings

You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts, and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.

Command Attributes

• Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is terminated for the session.

(Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)

• Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds;

Default: 0 seconds)

• Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)

• Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)

• Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)

• Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or None. (Default: None)

3-28

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

• Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud; Default: 9600 bps)

• Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.

(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)

•

Password

– Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No password)

•

Login

– Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the

Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)

Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters as required, then click Apply.

3. CLI only.

Figure 3-13 Console Port Settings

3-29

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.

Console(config)#line console

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3

Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

Console(config-line)#databits 8

Console(config-line)#parity none

Console(config-line)#speed 115200

Console(config-line)#stopbits 1

Console(config-line)#end

Console#show line

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: 60

Baudrate: 115200

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

VTY configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 600 sec

Console#

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-18

4-19

4-20

4-21

4-22

4-23

4-24

4-25

Telnet Settings

You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using

Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a password. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.

Command Attributes

•

Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.

(Default: Enabled)

•

Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch. (Default: 23)

3-30

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

(Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

•

Password

•

Login

– Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the

Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)

4. CLI only.

3-31

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for

Telnet access, then click Apply.

3-32

Figure 3-14 Enabling Telnet

CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.

Console(config)#line vty

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3

Console(config-line)#end

Console#show line

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: Disabled

Baudrate: 9600

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

VTY configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 600 sec

Console#

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-18

4-19

4-20

4-25

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

Configuring Event Logging

The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote

System Log (syslog) server, and displays a list of recent event messages.

System Log Configuration

The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory.

Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to

4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.

The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM.

Command Attributes

• System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process. (Default: Enabled)

• Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)

3-33

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-3 Logging Levels

Level Severity Name Description

7 Debug Debugging messages

Informational

Notice

Informational messages only

Normal but significant condition, such as cold start

4 Warning

Error

Critical

Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)

Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)

Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)

Alert

Emergency

Immediate action needed

System unusable

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

• RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary

RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to

RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)

Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.

3-34

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click System, Log, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click

Apply.

Figure 3-15 System Logs

CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current settings.

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#logging history ram 0

Console(config)#end

Console#show logging flash

Syslog logging: Enabled

History logging in FLASH: level emergencies

Console#

4-59

4-60

4-64

3-35

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Remote Log Configuration

The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the error messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.

Command Attributes

• Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process. (Default: Enabled)

• Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23.

The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.

The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See

RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23, Default: 23)

• Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)

• Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.

• Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the

Host IP List.

3-36

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click System, Log, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host

IP List, type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click

Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.

Figure 3-16 Remote Logs

CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the logging trap.

Console(config)#logging host 192.168.1.15

Console(config)#logging facility 23

Console(config)#logging trap 4

Console(config)#end

Console#show logging trap

Syslog logging: Enabled

REMOTELOG status: Enabled

REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7

REMOTELOG level type: Informational messages only

REMOTELOG server ip address: 192.168.1.15

REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0

Console#

4-61

4-62

4-63

3-37

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Displaying Log Messages

The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages. The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory (RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory.

Web – Click System, Log, Logs.

Figure 3-17 Displaying Logs

CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.

Console#show log ram

[1] 00:01:37 2001-01-01

"DHCP request failed - will retry later."

level: 4, module: 9, function: 0, and event no.: 10

[0] 00:00:35 2001-01-01

"System coldStart notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

Console#

4-64

3-38

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts

To alert system administrators of problems, the switch can use SMTP

(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level. The messages are sent to specified

SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients.

Command Attributes

• Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function.

(Default: Enabled)

• Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages. You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch.

• Severity – Sets the syslog severity threshold level (see table on

higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. For example, using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.

(Default: Level 7)

• SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers. The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails. Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.

• Email Destination Address List – Specifies the email recipients of alert messages. You can specify up to five recipients. Use the New

Email Destination Address text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.

3-39

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. Enable SMTP, specify a source email address, and select the minimum severity level. To add an IP address to the

SMTP Server List, type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove. Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages, and click Apply.

3-40

Figure 3-18 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

CLI – Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server, set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message, and specify the switch (source) and up to five recipient (destination) email addresses. Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration. Use the

show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration.

Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200

Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4

Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email

[email protected]

Console(config)##logging sendmail destination-email

[email protected]

Console(config)#logging sendmail

Console(config)#exit

Console#show logging sendmail

SMTP servers

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.200

SMTP minimum severity level: 4

SMTP destination email addresses

-----------------------------------------------

1. [email protected]

SMTP source email address: [email protected]

SMTP status: Enabled

Console#

4-68

4-69

4-70

4-71

Resetting the System

Web – Click System, Reset to reboot the switch. When prompted, confirm that you want reset the switch.

Figure 3-19 Resetting the System

3-41

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch. When prompted, confirm that you want to reset the switch.

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

4-30

Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On

Self-Test.

Setting the System Clock

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP).

Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. You can also manually

set the clock using the CLI. (See “calendar set” on page 4-77.) If the clock

is not set, the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.

When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.

Configuring SNTP

You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.

Command Attributes

• SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client.

This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP

Server field. (Default: Disabled)

• SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server.

(Range: 16-16284 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)

3-42

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

• SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence.

Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and click Apply.

Figure 3-20 SNTP Configuration

CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and then displays the current time and settings.

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#exit

Console#show sntp

Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004

Poll interval: 60

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status : Enabled

SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2

Current server: 128.250.36.2

Console#

4-74

4-75

4-73

3-43

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Setting the Time Zone

SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich

Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east

(before) or west (after) of UTC.

Command Attributes

•

Current Time – Displays the current time.

• Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)

• Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.

• Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.

• Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after

(west) UTC.

Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC, and click Apply.

3-44

Figure 3-21 Setting the System Clock

CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.

Console(config)#clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC

Console(config)#

4-76

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Simple Network Management Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network.

Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems.

The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware, as well as the traffic passing through its ports. A network management station can access this information using software such as SMC EliteView. Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings. To communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication. The options for configuring community strings, trap functions, and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections.

Setting Community Access Strings

You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access. All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table. For security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.

Command Attributes

• SNMP Community Capability – Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings.

• Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol.

Default strings: “public” (read-only), “private” (read/write)

Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive

3-45

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• Access Mode

- Read-Only – Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

- Read/Write – Specifies read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.

Figure 3-22 Configuring SNMP Community Strings

CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.

Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw

Console(config)#

4-137

Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types

Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers. You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station (using network management platforms such as SMC EliteView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.

3-46

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Command Attributes

• Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.

• Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.

• Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of the host (the targeted recipient).

• Trap Manager Community String – Community string sent with the notification operation. (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)

• Trap Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps. (The default is version 1.)

• Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process. (Default: Enabled.)

• Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a trap message whenever a port link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive trap messages, and then click

Add. Select the trap types required using the check boxes for

Authentication and Link-up/down traps, and then click Apply.

Figure 3-23 Configuring IP Trap Managers

3-47

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link-up, link-down traps.

Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.19 private version 2c

4-139

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps authentication 4-141

User Authentication

You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options:

• User Accounts – Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users.

• Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure access rights.

• HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.

• SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).

• Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.

• 802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to specific ports.

• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.

Configuring User Accounts

The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters.

However, the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and store it in a safe place.

The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”

3-48

SER

UTHENTICATION

Command Attributes

• Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)

• New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.

- User Name – The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)

- Access Level – Specifies the user level.

(Options: Normal and Privileged)

- Password – Specifies the user password.

(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)

• Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user name.

•

Add/Remove – Adds or removes an account from the list.

Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, specify a user name, select the user’s access level, then enter a password and confirm it. Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the

Account List. To change the password for a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the password by entering it again, then click Apply.

Figure 3-24 Access Levels

3-49

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the password.

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

4-35

Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication

Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS+ protocols.

Remote

Authentication Dial-in

User Service

(RADIUS) and

Terminal Access

Controller Access

Control System Plus

(TACACS+) are logon authentication

Web

Telnet

RADIUS/

TACACS+ server console

1. Client attempts management access.

2. Switch contacts authentication server.

3. Authentication server challenges client.

4. Client responds with proper password or key.

5. Authentication server approves access.

6. Switch grants management access.

protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware or TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch.

RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

3-50

SER

UTHENTICATION

Command Usage

• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port, web browser, or

Telnet.

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.

• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1)

RADIUS, (2) TACACS and (3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.

Command Attributes

• Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:

- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.

- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.

- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.

- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence.

3-51

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-52

• RADIUS Settings

- Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.

- ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured. The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers. The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user.

- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default:

10.1.0.1)

- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default:

1812)

- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server.

(Range: 1-30; Default: 2)

- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request.

(Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)

• TACACS Settings

- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default:

10.11.12.13)

- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)

- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually

entering user names and passwords using the CLI. (See

“username” on page 4-35.)

SER

UTHENTICATION

Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence

(i.e., one to three methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or

TACACS+ authentication if selected, and click Apply.

Figure 3-25 Authentication Settings

3-53

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#end

Console#show radius-server

4-95

4-99

4-100

4-98

4-101

Remote RADIUS server configuration:

Global settings:

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 181

Retransmit times: 5

Request timeout: 10

Server 1:

Server IP address: 192.168.1.25

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 1812

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Console#configure

Console(config)#authentication login tacacs

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console#show tacacs-server

Server IP address: 10.20.30.40

Communication key with tacacs server: *****

Server port number: 200

Console#

4-95

4-102

4-103

4-104

Configuring HTTPS

You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer

Protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.

Command Usage

• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch. However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.

3-54

SER

UTHENTICATION

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser: https://device[:port_number]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.

- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer

5.x or above and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.

• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support

HTTPS:

Table 3-4 HTTPS System Support

Web Browser

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later

Operating System

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000,

Windows XP

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000,

Windows XP, Solaris 2.6

•

To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default

Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-56.

Command Attributes

• HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch. (Default: Enabled)

•

Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default:

Port 443)

3-55

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number, then click Apply.

3-56

Figure 3-26 HTTPS Settings

CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 441

Console(config)#

4-42

4-43

Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate

When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site.

This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority.

Note: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure

Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.

SER

UTHENTICATION

When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default (unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>

Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>

Source private file name: <private key file name>

Private password: <password for private key>

4-87

Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the switch, type:

Console#reload

Configuring the Secure Shell

The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for

Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for

Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.

The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet. When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered.

Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol.

Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.

3-57

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Command Usage

The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or

TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified on the

Authentication Settings page (page 3-50). If public key authentication is

specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH Host Key

Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).

To use the SSH server, complete these steps:

1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host public/private key pair.

2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.

An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example:

10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254

15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233

76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206

519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397

1752646358058176716709574804776117

3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key

command (page 4-87) to copy a file containing the public key for all the

SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts

page as described on page 3-48.) The clients are subsequently

authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts

3-58

SER

UTHENTICATION

public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:

1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880

055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178

136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840

848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453

06393916643 [email protected]

4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.

5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on the switch.

6. Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access. The following exchanges take place during this process: a. The client sends its public key to the switch. b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory. c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client. d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch. e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.

Notes: 1. To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file.

However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.

3-59

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

2. The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of client sessions includes both current

Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.

Generating the Host Key Pair

A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section (Command

Usage).

Field Attributes

• Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.

- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key

(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g.,

65537), and the last string is the encoded modulus.

- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard

(DSS). The last string is the encoded modulus.

• Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2),

Both; Default: RSA)

The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.

• Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from

RAM (i.e., volatile memory to flash memory. Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM by default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.

3-60

SER

UTHENTICATION

• Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page.

• Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory

(RAM) and non-volatile memory (Flash).

Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if required) prior to generating the key, and then click

Generate.

Figure 3-27 SSH Host-Key Settings

3-61

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and

DSA algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate

Console#ip ssh save host-key

Console#show public-key host

Host:

4-49

RSA:

1024 65537

127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761

8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739

6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368

4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511

729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891

DSA: ssh-dss

AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcERe6hlasfEthIwmj hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKc0

5xfzkBiKviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6DkZAAAAFQCN

Znx17dwpW8RrVDQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9O qRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeFY5ilc3lDCNBue eLykZzVS+RS+azTKIkzrJh8GLGNq375R55yRxFvmcGInQ7IphPqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEA

AACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOIRTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOY

XDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5af8TUAgPNWKV6W0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj

0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=

Console#

Configuring the SSH Server

The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.

Field Attributes

• SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch. (Default: Disabled)

• Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.

• SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt. (Range: 1-120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)

3-62

SER

UTHENTICATION

• SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process.

(Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)

• SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size.

(Range: 512-896 bits; Default:768)

- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.

- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.

Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.

Figure 3-28 SSH Server Settings

3-63

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH, and then disables this connection.

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5

Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512

Console(config)#end

Console#show ip ssh

SSH Enabled - version 2.0

Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 5

Server key size: 512 bits

Console#show ssh

Connection Version State Username Encryption

4-49

4-50

4-51

4-55

0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

Console#disconnect 0

Console#

4-25

Configuring Port Security

Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.

When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new

MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port. If a device with an unauthorized

MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message.

To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address

Table (page 3-121). When the port has reached the maximum number of

MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The MAC addresses

3-64

SER

UTHENTICATION

already in the address table will be retained and will not age out. Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch.

Command Usage

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

- It cannot use port monitoring.

- It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.

- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.

- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.

• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero. You must configure a maximum address count from

1 - 1024 for the port to allow access.

• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page

(page 3-90).

Command Attributes

•

Port – Port number.

•

Name – Descriptive text (page 4-144).

• Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:

- None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)

- Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.

- Shutdown: Disable the port.

- Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.

• Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port.

(Default: Disabled)

• Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled))

•

Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-94 and 3-96).

3-65

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, and click Apply.

Figure 3-29 Configuring Port Security

CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the port, and then enables port security for the port.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown

Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20

Console(config-if)#port security

Console(config-if)#

4-105

Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication

Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data.

The IEEE 802.1X (dot1X) standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

3-66

SER

UTHENTICATION

This switch uses the Extensible

Authentication

802.1x

client

Protocol over LANs

(EAPOL) to exchange authentication protocol messages with the client, and a

RADIUS server

1. Client attempts to access a switch port.

2. Switch sends client an identity request.

3. Client sends back identity information.

4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.

5. Authentication server challenges client.

6. Client responds with proper credentials.

7. Authentication server approves access.

8. Switch grants client access to this port.

remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights. When a client (i.e., Supplicant) connects to a switch port, the switch

(i.e., Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client.

The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used. The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The authentication method must be MD5. The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate.

The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet. If authentication is successful, the switch allows the client to access the network. Otherwise, network access is denied and the port remains blocked.

The operation of 802.1X on the switch requires the following:

• The switch must have an IP address assigned.

• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified.

• 802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.

• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X “Auto” mode.

• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software installed and properly configured.

3-67

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)

• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type – MD5. (Some clients have native support in

Windows, otherwise the dot1x client must support it.)

Displaying 802.1X Global Settings

The 802.1X protocol provides client authentication.

Command Attributes

802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for 802.1X.

Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.

3-68

Figure 3-30 802.1X Global Information

CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

802.1X Port Summary

4-114

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/2 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1/1

802.1X is disabled on port 1/26

Console#

SER

UTHENTICATION

Configuring 802.1X Global Settings

The 802.1X protocol includes port authentication. The 802.1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active.

Command Attributes

• 802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for

802.1X. (Default: Disabled)

Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for the switch, and click Apply.

Figure 3-31 802.1X Configuration

CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.

Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control

Console(config)#

4-108

3-69

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-70

Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X

When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server. These parameters are described in this section.

Command Attributes

• Port – Port number.

• Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.

(Default: Disabled)

•

Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an 802.1X-authorized port. (Options: Single-Host, Multi-Host;

Default: Single-Host)

•

Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024;

Default: 5)

• Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:

- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)

- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

• Re-authen – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval specified by the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port.

(Default: Disabled)

• Max-Req – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session. (Range: 1-10; Default 2)

SER

UTHENTICATION

• Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max

Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)

•

Re-authen Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;

Default: 3600 seconds)

• Tx Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet.

(Range: 1-65535; Default: 30 seconds)

• Authorized –

- Yes – Connected client is authorized.

- No – Connected client is not authorized.

- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.

• Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.

• Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.

Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters required, and click Apply.

Figure 3-32 802.1X Port Configuration

3-71

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-72

CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a

description of the additional fields displayed in this example, see “show dot1x” on page 4-114.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 30

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 1800

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

4-109

4-111

4-109

4-112

4-113

4-114

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes

1/26 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1/1

802.1X is enabled on port 1/2

reauth-enabled: Enable

reauth-period: 1800

quiet-period: 30

tx-period: 40

supplicant-timeout: 30

server-timeout: 10

reauth-max: 2

max-req: 5

Status Authorized

Operation mode Single-Host

Max count 5

Port-control Auto

Supplicant 00-00-e8-49-5e-dc

Current Identifier 3

Authenticator State Machine

State Authenticated

Reauth Count 0

Backend State Machine

State Idle

Request Count 0

Identifier(Server) 2

Reauthentication State Machine

802.1X is disabled on port 1/26

Console#

SER

UTHENTICATION

Displaying 802.1X Statistics

This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.

Parameter

Rx EAPOL Start

Rx EAPOL Logoff

Rx EAPOL Invalid

Rx EAPOL Total

Rx EAP Resp/Id

Rx EAP Resp/Oth

Rx EAP LenError

Rx Last EAPOLVer

Rx Last EAPOLSrc

Tx EAPOL Total

Tx EAP Req/Id

Tx EAP Req/Oth

Table 3-5 802.1X Statistics

Description

The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.

The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator.

The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than

Resp/Id frames) that have been received by this

Authenticator.

The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.

The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.

The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.

The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been transmitted by this

Authenticator.

3-73

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then click Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.

3-74

Figure 3-33 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics

CLI – This example displays the 802.1X statistics for port 4.

Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4

4-114

Eth 1/4

Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP

Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError

2 0 0 1007 672 0 0

Last Last

EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc

1 00-00-E8-98-73-21

Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP

Total Req/Id Req/Oth

2017 1005 0

Console#

SER

UTHENTICATION

Filtering Addresses for Management Access

You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface,

SNMP, or Telnet.

Command Usage

• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default.

Once you add an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses.

• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.

• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.

• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or

Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.

• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.

• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address.

Command Attributes

• Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.

• SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.

• Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.

• IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.

• Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.

3-75

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• End IP Address – The end address of a range.

• Add/Remove Filtering Entry – Adds/removes an IP address from the list.

Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface, and click

Add IP Filtering Entry to update the filter list.

Figure 3-34 Creating a Web IP Filter List

3-76

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.

Console(config)#management snmp-client 10.1.2.3

Console(config)#end

Console#show management all-client

Management IP Filter

HTTP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 10.1.2.1 10.1.2.254

SNMP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 10.1.2.3 10.1.2.3

TELNET-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

Console#

4-38

Access Control Lists

Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access list, add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.

Configuring Access Control Lists

An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses, MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.

3-77

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-78

Command Usage

The following restrictions apply to ACLs:

• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.

• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.

• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20.

• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. However, you can only bind one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other words, only two ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.

The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:

1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.

Setting the ACL Name and Type

Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an

ACL.

Command Attributes

• Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• Type – There are three filtering modes:

Standard: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source

IP address.

Extended: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the “TCP” protocol is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

MAC: MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type

(RFC 1060).

Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the

Name field, select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list.

Figure 3-35 Selecting ACL Type

CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named david.

Console(config)#access-list ip standard david

Console(config-std-acl)#

4-119

Configuring a Standard IP ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the

Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)

• IP Address – Source IP address.

3-79

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and compared with the address for each

IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type

(Any, Host, or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.

3-80

Figure 3-36 ACL Configuration - Standard IP

CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address

10.1.1.21 and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.

Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

Console(config-std-acl)#

4-120

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Configuring an Extended IP ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,

“Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields.

(Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)

• Source/Destination Address – Source or destination IP address.

• Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or destination address. (See the description for Subnet Mask on

page 3-79.)

• Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:

- Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)

- TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)

- DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)

• Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or

Others, where others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255).

(Options: TCP, UDP, Others; Default: TCP)

• Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)

• Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)

• Control Code Bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match. The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and

“0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be specified:

- 1 (fin) – Finish

- 2 (syn) – Synchronize

3-81

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

- 4 (rst) – Reset

- 8 (psh) – Push

- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement

- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer

For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set:

- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2

- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18

- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type, protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.

3-82

Figure 3-37 ACL Configuration - Extended IP

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

CLI – This example adds two rules:

1. Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x.

For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 &

255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.

2. Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).

3. Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the

TCP control code set to “SYN.”

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

4-122

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2

Console(config-std-acl)#

Configuring a MAC ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or

“MAC” to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)

• Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.

• Source/Destination Bitmask – Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address.

• VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)

3-83

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets. (Range: 0-65535)

A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC

1060. A few of the more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP),

8137 (IPX).

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as VID or Ethernet type. Then click Add.

3-84

Figure 3-38 ACL Configuration - MAC

CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800

Console(config-mac-acl)#

4-130

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Binding a Port to an Access Control List

After configuring Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to the ports that need to filter traffic. You can assign one IP access list to any port, but you can only assign one MAC access list to all the ports on the switch.

Command Usage

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

• This switch only supports ACLs for ingress filtering. You can only bind one IP ACL to any port, and one MAC ACL globally, for ingress filtering.

Command Attributes

• Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-26/52)

• IP – Specifies the IP Access List to enable for a port.

• MAC – Specifies the MAC Access List to enable globally.

• IN – ACL for ingress packets.

• ACL Name – Name of the ACL.

3-85

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enabled field for the port you want to bind to an ACL, select the required ACL from the drop-down list, then click Apply.

3-86

Figure 3-39 Binding a Port to an ACL

CLI – This example assigns an IP and MAC access list to port 1, and an IP access list to port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in

Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in

Console(config-if)#

this item on the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on page 3-17.)

4-125

4-132

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Port Configuration

Displaying Connection Status

You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and auto-negotiation.

Field Attributes (Web)

• Name – Interface label.

• Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)

• Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.

• Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.

• Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

(Auto, or fixed choice)

• Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use. (IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)

• Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.

•

Trunk Member

– Shows if port is a trunk member.

•

Creation

– Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.

5. Port Information only.

6. Trunk Information only.

3-87

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.

3-88

Figure 3-40 Displaying Port/Trunk Information

Field Attributes (CLI)

Basic Information:

• Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or

SFP)

• MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access

Configuration:

• Name – Interface label.

• Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).

• Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)

ORT

ONFIGURATION

• Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see

“Configuring Interface Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.

- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

- Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control

- FC - Supports flow control

• Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.

• Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold.

(64-95232000 octets per second)

• Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.

• LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.

• Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.

• Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)

• Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown, or none)

Current Status:

• Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.

• Port Operation Status – Provides detailed information on port state.

(Displayed only when the link is up.)

• Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

• Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.

(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)

3-89

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/5

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-30-f1-47-58-46

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second

Flow control: Disabled

Lacp: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Current status:

Link status: Down

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Console#

4-152

Configuring Interface Connections

You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.

Command Attributes

• Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security reasons.

• Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode. (i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled)

• Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.

3-90

ORT

ONFIGURATION

• Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.

- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch chip only supports symmetric

pause frames.)

- FC - Supports flow control

Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.)

(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for

100BASE-TX – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full; 1000BASE-T –

10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH –

1000full)

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks

and select port members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 3-92.

Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow

Control options.

3-91

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required interface settings, and click Apply.

Figure 3-41 Port/Trunk Configuration

CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13

Console(config-if)#shutdown

Console(config-if)#no shutdown

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

4-149

4-146

4-145

4-148

4-147

Creating Trunk Groups

You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two devices. You can create up to four trunks at a time.

The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation

Control Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco

EtherChannel standard. On the other hand, LACP configured ports can

3-92

ORT

ONFIGURATION

automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports on the switch as

LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it.

Command Usage

Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails.

However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends.

When using a port trunk, take note of the following points:

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• You can create up to four trunks on the switch, with up to eight ports per trunk.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.

• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.

3-93

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Statically Configuring a Trunk

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, you may not be able to link switches of different types, depending on the manufacturer’s implementation.

However, note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco

EtherChannel compatible.

active links statically configured

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface.

Command Attributes

• Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit,

Port).

• New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.

- Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-4)

- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/52)

3-94

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-4 in the

Trunk field, select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 3-42 Static Trunk Configuration

3-95

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2. Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

Console(config)#interface port-channel 2

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#channel-group 2

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#channel-group 2

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 2

Information of Trunk 2

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-00-E8-AA-AA-01

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Flow control: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: User

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2,

Console#

the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 3-95).

4-165

4-152

Enabling LACP on Selected Ports

Command Usage

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure you enable LACP before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before disabling

LACP.

• If the target switch has also enabled

LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically. active links dynamically enabled configured members backup link

3-96

ORT

ONFIGURATION

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID.

• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.

• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

• Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in

Command Attributes

•

Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Unit, Port).

•

New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.

- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/52)

Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 3-43 LACP Trunk Configuration

3-97

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect these ports to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 22-22-22-22-22-2d

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Note: If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 4-170) is not

4-165

4-152

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Flow control status: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: Lacp

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,

Console#

Configuring LACP Parameters

Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:

• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.

• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.

• However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.

3-98

ORT

ONFIGURATION

set (through the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group (lacp admin key, as

described in this section and on page 4-169).

Command Attributes

Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on this switch.

•

Port – Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations.

(Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)

- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.

- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems.

•

Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG.

(Range: 0-65535; Default: 1)

•

Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)

Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.

3-99

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin

Key, and Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.

Figure 3-44 LACP - Aggregation Port

3-100

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-4.

Ports 1-4 are used as active members of the LAG.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512

Console(config-if)#end

4-168

4-169

4-171

Console#show lacp sysid

Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address

-------------------------------------------------------------------

1 3 00-00-E9-31-31-31

2 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31

3 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31

4 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel : 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key : 120

Admin Key : 0

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec

LACP System Priority: 3

LACP Port Priority: 128

Admin Key: 120

Oper Key: 120

Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

3-101

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Displaying LACP Port Counters

You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.

Field

LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.

LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.

Marker Sent

Marker Received

Table 3-6 LACP Port Counters

Description

Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.

Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.

LACPDUs Unknown

Pkts

Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the

Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow

Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the

Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.

LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols

Ethernet Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display the corresponding information.

3-102

Figure 3-45 LACP - Port Counters Information

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following example displays LACP counters.

Console#show lacp counters

Port channel : 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Sent: 91

LACPDUs Receive: 43

Marker Sent: 0

Marker Receive: 0

LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0

LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0

Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side

You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation.

Field

Oper Key

Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information

Description

Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.

Admin Key

LACPDUs

Internal

LACP System

Priority

Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.

Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.

LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.

3-103

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-7 LACP Internal Configuration Information (Continued)

Field

LACP Port

Priority

Admin State,

Oper State

Description

LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.

Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:

• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;

• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information, administratively configured for the partner.

• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e., distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.

• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.

• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be

IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link

Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link

Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.

• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.

• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.

• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)

3-104

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display the corresponding information.

Figure 3-46 LACP - Port Internal Information

CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1.

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel : 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key : 120

Admin Key : 0

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec

LACP System Priority: 3

LACP Port Priority: 128

Admin Key: 120

Oper Key: 120

Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

3-105

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side

You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation.

Table 3-8 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information

Field

Partner Admin

System ID

Description

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.

Partner Oper System

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.

Partner Admin

Port Number

Partner Oper

Port Number

Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol partner.

Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.

Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.

Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Oper Key

Admin State

Oper State

Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

Operational values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

3-106

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to display the corresponding information.

Figure 3-47 LACP - Port Neighbors Information

CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.

Console#show lacp 1 neighbors

Port channel 1 neighbors

– Shows if a port is a trunk member.

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Partner Admin System ID: 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00

Partner Oper System ID: 3, 00-30-F1-CE-2A-20

Partner Admin Port Number: 5

Partner Oper Port Number: 3

Port Admin Priority: 32768

Port Oper Priority: 128

Admin Key: 0

Oper Key: 120

Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,

synchronization, long timeout,

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

3-107

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds

Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt.

You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped.

Command Usage

• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.

• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.

• The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.

Command Attributes

•

Port

– Port number.

•

Trunk

– Trunk number.

•

Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)

• Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth.

(Range: 64-95232000 octets per second; Default: 32000)

• Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled. (Default: Enabled)

•

Trunk

7. Port Broadcast Control.

8. Trunk Broadcast Control.

3-108

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Port/Trunk Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, mark the Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply.

Figure 3-48 Port Broadcast Control

3-109

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Configuring Port Mirroring

You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real-time analysis.

You can then attach a logic analyzer or

RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.

Source port(s)

Single target port

Command Usage

• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.

• All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.

• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port.

3-110

CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 octets per second for port 2 (which applies to all ports).

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2

Information of Eth 1/2

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 octets/second

Lacp status: Enabled

Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0

Gvrp status: Disabled

Allowed Vlan: 1(u),

Forbidden Vlan:

Private-VLAN mode: NONE

Private-VLAN host-association: NONE

Private-VLAN mapping: NONE

Console#

4-150

4-155

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Command Attributes

• Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.

• Source Unit – The unit whose port traffic will be monitored.

• Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored.

• Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port,

Rx (receive), or Tx (transmit). (Default: Rx)

• Target Unit – The unit whose port will “duplicate” or “mirror” the traffic on the source port.

• Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port.

Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port/ unit, the traffic type to be mirrored, and the monitor port/unit, then click

Add.

Figure 3-49 Mirror Port Configuration

CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13 tx

Console(config-if)#

multiplied by the “rate limit level” (page 3-113) to set the actual rate limit

4-157

3-111

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Configuring Rate Limits

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port. Rate limiting is configured on ports at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.

Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes.

Rate Limit Granularity

Rate limit granularity is an additional feature enabling the network manager greater control over traffic on the network. The “rate limit granularity” is

for an interface. Granularity is a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

Command Usage

• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity can be set to

512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps

• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.

Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Granularity. Select the required rate limit granularity for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet, and click apply.

3-112

Figure 3-50 Rate Limit Granularity Configuration

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI - This example sets and displays Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity.

Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 512

4-161

Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300 4-161

console#show rate-limit

4-162

Fast ethernet granularity: 512

Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300

Console#

Rate Limit Configuration

Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting.

Command Usage

• Input and output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces.

Command Attributes

•

Port/Trunk – Displays the port number.

•

Rate Limit Status – Enables or disables the rate limit.

(Default: Disabled)

• Rate Limit Level – Sets the rate limit level. (Range: 1-30: Default: 30)

Note: Actual rate limit = Rate Limit Level * Granularity

3-113

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration.

Enable the Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces, set the Rate Limit

Level, and click Apply.

Figure 3-51 Output Rate Limit Port Configuration

CLI - This example sets the rate limit level for input and output traffic passing through port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 25

Console(config-if)#rate-limit output level 25

Console(config-if)#

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

4-160

Showing Port Statistics

You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces

Group and Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second. Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.

3-114

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as SMC EliteView.

Table 3-9 Port Statistics

Description Parameter

Interface Statistics

Received Octets

Received Unicast

Packets

Received Multicast

Packets

Received Broadcast

Packets

Received Discarded

Packets

Received Unknown

Packets

Received Errors

Transmit Octets

Transmit Unicast

Packets

The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.

The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.

The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

3-115

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-116

Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

Transmit Multicast

Packets

Transmit Broadcast

Packets

Transmit Discarded

Packets

Transmit Errors

Description

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Etherlike Statistics

Alignment Errors

Late Collisions

FCS Errors

Excessive Collisions

The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).

The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.

Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.

Internal MAC Transmit

Errors

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

Multiple Collision

Frames

Carrier Sense Errors

SQE Test Errors

Frames Too Long

A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface.

A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.

Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy.

Internal MAC Receive

Errors

A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.

RMON Statistics

Drop Events

Jabbers

Received Bytes

The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources.

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including

FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error.

Total number of bytes of data received on the network.

This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of

Ethernet utilization.

Collisions

Received Frames

Broadcast Frames

Description

A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.

The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.

The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

3-117

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-9 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

Multicast Frames

CRC/Alignment Errors The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).

Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than

64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including

FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Frames

Description

The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address.

Fragments

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including

FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

The total number of frames received that were less than

64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error.

64 Bytes Frames

65-127 Byte Frames

128-255 Byte Frames

256-511 Byte Frames

512-1023 Byte Frames

1024-1518 Byte Frames

1519-1536 Byte Frames

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length

(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

3-118

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click

Query. You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.

Figure 3-52 Port Statistics

3-119

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example shows statistics for port 13.

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/13

4-153

Ethernet 1/13

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122

Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027

Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552

Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871

Console#

3-120

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

Address Table Settings

Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.

Setting Static Addresses

A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.

When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.

Command Attributes

•

Static Address Counts

– The number of manually configured addresses.

• Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.

• Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.

• MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

9. Web Only.

3-121

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the

MAC address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.

Figure 3-53 Configuring a Static Address Table

CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset.

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

Console(config)#

4-178

Displaying the Address Table

The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.

• MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.

3-122

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).

• Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.

• Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.

Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type

(i.e., mark the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the displayed addresses, and then click Query.

Figure 3-54 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table

CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.

4-179

Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1

Interface Mac Address Vlan Type

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE 1 Delete-on-reset

Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60 2 Learned

Console#

3-123

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Changing the Aging Time

You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.

Command Attributes

• Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.

• Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.

(Range: 10-30000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.

Figure 3-55 Setting the Address Aging Time

CLI – This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds.

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400

Console(config)#

4-180

Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration

The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.

3-124

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device

(STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device

(except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports.

After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.

Designated

Root x x x

Designated

Bridge

Designated

Port x x

Root

Port

Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for

Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root

Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval

(Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology.

RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP.

RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds, compared to 30 seconds or more for STP) by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning, predefining an alternate route

3-125

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

that can be used when a node or port fails, and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs.

Displaying Global Settings

You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen.

Field Attributes

• Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA-compliant network.

• Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address (where the address is taken from the switch system).

• Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.

All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.

(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).

This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

3-126

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

• Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the

Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network.

- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device.

• Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured.

• Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)

•

Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the

STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

• Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a configuration message.

• Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

3-127

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames.

In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

• Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs.

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.

Figure 3-56 STA Information

3-128

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port.

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

4-195

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode :RSTP

Spanning tree enable/disable :enabled

Priority :32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.) :2

Bridge Max Age (sec.) :20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.) :15

Root Hello Time (sec.) :2

Root Max Age (sec.) :20

Root Forward Delay (sec.) :15

Designated Root :32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Current root port :1

Current root cost :200000

Number of topology changes :1

Last topology changes time (sec.):13380

Transmission limit :3

Path Cost Method :long

Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network.

Configuring Global Settings

Global settings apply to the entire switch.

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D

BPDUs.

•

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

10. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN boundaries.

3-129

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP

BPDU) after a port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only

802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

Command Attributes

Basic Configuration of Global Settings

• Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch.

(Default: Enabled)

• Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); (i.e., when this option is selected, the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).

- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.

• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the

STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

(Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority.)

- Default: 32768

- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096

- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768,

36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440

3-130

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

Root Device Configuration

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

- Default: 2

- Minimum: 1

- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]

• Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

- Default: 20

- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].

- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

- Default: 15

- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]

- Maximum: 30

3-131

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Configuration Settings for RSTP

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface.

- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.

(This is the default.)

- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.

• Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and click Apply.

3-132

Figure 3-57 STA Configuration

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to

RSTP, and then configures the STA and RSTP parameters.

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 45056

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Console(config)#

4-183

4-184

4-187

4-185

4-186

4-185

4-188

4-188

Displaying Interface Settings

The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.

Field Attributes

• Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.

• STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning

Tree:

- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward packets.

- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.

- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

The rules defining port status are:

- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding.

- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding.

3-133

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change state to learning, and then to forwarding.

• Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

• Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.

• Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.

• Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.

• Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto-detection, as described for Admin

Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3-137.

• Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for

Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3-137 (i.e., true

or false), but will be set to false if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.

• Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e.,

root port), connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge

(i.e., designated port), or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs fail or are removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no role within the spanning tree.

3-134

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

Alternate port receives more useful BPDUs from another bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port.

A x

R: Root Port

A: Alternate Port

D: Designated Port

B: Backup Port

Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port.

A x

D B

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Information only)

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.

• Path cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree

Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

3-135

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the

Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

• Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin

Edge port, and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.

• Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying

Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge

Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk

Information.

3-136

Figure 3-58 STA Port Information

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.

Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5

Eth 1/ 5 information

--------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

4-195

Role: disable

State: discarding

Path cost: 100000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 0

Designated port : 128.5

Designated root: 32768.0030F1D32600

Designated bridge: 32768.0030F1D32600

Fast forwarding: disabled

Forward transitions: 0

Admin edge port: disabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enabled

Console#

Configuring Interface Settings

You can configure RSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to indicate a point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in this section means

“interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

Command Attributes

The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:

• STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning

Tree. (See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-133 for additional

information.)

- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward packets.

3-137

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Configuration only)

The following interface attributes can be configured:

• Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface.

(Default: Enabled).

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree

Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

- Default: 128

- Range: 0-240, in steps of 16

• Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.

- Range:

- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000

- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000

- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000

3-138

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

ONFIGURATION

-Default:

- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000;

trunk: 500,000

- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000;

trunk: 50,000

- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting)

• Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged

LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.

However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)

• Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including

Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or

STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces.

(Default: Disabled)

3-139

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Modify the required attributes, then click Apply.

Figure 3-59 STA Port Configuration

CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto

Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#

connected to these devices (as described in “Adding Static

4-191

4-190

4-193

4-191

VLAN Configuration

IEEE 802.1Q VLANs

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at

Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks.

This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

3-140

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This switch supports the following VLAN features:

• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard

• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol

• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs

• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs

• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices

• Priority tagging

Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports

VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports

VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.

3-141

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or

VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.

tagged frames

VA VA

VA: VLAN Aware

VU: VLAN Unaware tagged frames untagged frames

VA VA VU

VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged

VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.

Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.

Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other

VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets. However, you should use

IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration.

3-142

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration

Protocol) defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the

VLANs to which each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter) supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports. VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests.

To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs (using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable

GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.

Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports

Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-150). But you can

still enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the network.

3-143

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

9 3 4

Port-based VLAN

5 6 7 8

10 11

15 16

Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames

If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged

VLAN. However, to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.

Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames.

When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any

VLAN-aware devices, the switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any

VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host), the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.

3-144

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network. VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.

(Default: Disabled)

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable

GVRP, and click Apply.

Figure 3-60 Enabling GVRP

CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.

Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp

Console(config)#

4-217

Displaying Basic VLAN Information

The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the

VLAN type supported by the switch.

Field Attributes

•

VLAN Version Number

– The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.

• Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of

VLANs that can be configured on this switch.

11. Web Only.

3-145

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.

3-146

Figure 3-61 VLAN Basic Information

CLI – Enter the following command.

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support vlan numbers: 255

Max support vlan ID: 4094

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

Global GVRP status: Enabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

4-218

Displaying Current VLANs

The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each

VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use

VLAN tagging. However, if you just want to create a small port-based

VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable tagging.

Command Attributes (Web)

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up

Time).

• Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.

- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.

- Permanent: Added as a static entry.

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

• Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.

• Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down list.

Figure 3-62 Displaying Current VLANs

Command Attributes (CLI)

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).

• Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.

- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.

- Static: Added as a static entry.

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.

- Active: VLAN is operational.

- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.

3-147

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-148

CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.

Console#show vlan id 1

Vlan ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

4-207

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)

Eth1/26(S)

Console#

Creating VLANs

Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.

Command Attributes

•

Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system.

Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN.

• New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not added to the VLAN tag.)

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).

• VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Enabled: VLAN is operational.

- Disabled: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Active: VLAN is operational.

- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

• Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and then click Add.

Figure 3-63 Configuring a VLAN Static List

CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active

Console(config-vlan)#end

Console#show vlan

Vlan ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

4-197

4-198

4-207

Status: Active

Ports/Channel groups: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)

Eth1/26(S)

Vlan ID: 2

Type: Static

Name: R&D

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channel:

Console(config-vlan)#

3-149

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-150

Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)

Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected

VLAN index. Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q

VLAN compliant devices, or untagged they are not connected to any

VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol.

Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index

(page 3-152). However, note that this configuration page can

only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.

2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and can only be modified by first reassigning the

default port VLAN ID as described under “Configuring

VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-153.

Command Attributes

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

- Enable: VLAN is operational.

- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Port – Port identifier.

• Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:

- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.

- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port.

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

- Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the

VLAN via GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN

Registration” on page 3-143.

- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static

Table page.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks. Click Apply.

Figure 3-64 Configuring a VLAN Static Table

CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to

VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

4-205

3-151

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)

Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Port or trunk identifier.

• Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.

• Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.

Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.

3-152

Figure 3-65 VLAN Static Membership by Port

CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes

Port 3 from VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2

effect. (See “Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3-15.)

4-205

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces

You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering,

GVRP status, and GARP timers.

Command Usage

• GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network.

• GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with

GVRP registration/deregistration.

Command Attributes

• PVID – VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)

If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN. (Options: All, Tagged; Default: All)

• Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for

VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member. (Default:

Disabled)

- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

3-153

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

- Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent

BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

• GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take

When disabled, any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports. (Default: Disabled)

•

GARP Join Timer

– The interval between transmitting requests/ queries to participate in a VLAN group.

(Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)

•

GARP Leave Timer

– The interval a port waits before leaving a

VLAN group. This time should be set to more than twice the join time.

This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group.

(Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)

•

GARP LeaveAll Timer

– The interval between sending out a

LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval should be considerably larger than the

Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group.

(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)

12. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer

3-154

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

• Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface.

(Default: Hybrid)

- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the

PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.

- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static

Table page.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk

Configuration. Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.

Figure 3-66 VLAN Port Configuration

3-155

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns

PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-159) to designate

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

4-202

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp

Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20

Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90

Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

4-203

4-204

4-219

4-220

4-201

Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private

VLANs: primary/secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated

VLANs. A primary VLAN contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated

VLANs, on the other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated (or host) ports.

In all cases, the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.

Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch.)

To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:

one or more community VLANs, and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the VLAN groups.

3-156

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

2. Use the Private VLAN Association menu (page 3-160) to map the

secondary (i.e., community) VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.

3. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-162) to set

the port type to promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN), or host (i.e., having access restricted to community

VLAN members, and channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports). Then assign any promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN.

To configure an isolated VLAN, follow these steps:

1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-159) to designate

an isolated VLAN that will channel all traffic through a single promiscuous port.

2. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-162) to set

the port type to promiscuous (i.e., the single channel to the external network), or isolated (i.e., having access only to the promiscuous port in its own VLAN). Then assign the promiscuous port and all host ports to an isolated VLAN.

Displaying Current Private VLANs

The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private

VLANs configured on the switch, including primary, community, and isolated VLANs, and their assigned interfaces.

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094), and VLAN type.

• Primary VLAN – The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated. A primary VLAN displays its own ID, a community VLAN displays the associated primary VLAN, and an isolated VLAN displays the stand-alone VLAN.

• Ports List – The list of ports (and assigned port type) in the selected private VLAN.

3-157

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Information. Select the desired port from the VLAN ID drop-down menu.

3-158

Figure 3-67 Private VLAN Information

CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.

Console#show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

4-216

-------- ----------- ---------- --------------------------------

5 primary Eth1/ 3

5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

Console#

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Configuring Private VLANs

The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create/remove primary, community, or isolated VLANs.

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Type – There are three types of private VLANs:

- Primary VLANs – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and to community ports within secondary (or community) VLANs.

- Community VLANs - Conveys traffic between community ports, and to their promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.

- Isolated VLANs – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.

• Current – Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Configuration. Enter the VLAN ID number, select Primary, Isolated or Community type, then click Add. To remove a private VLAN from the switch, highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove. Note that all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted.

Figure 3-68 Private VLAN Configuration

3-159

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN, and VLAN

6 as a community VLAN and VLAN 7 as an isolated VLAN.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 primary

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 6 community

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 7 isolated

Console(config-vlan)#

4-197

4-210

Associating VLANs

Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN.

Command Attributes

• Primary VLAN ID – ID of primary VLAN (1-4094).

• Association – Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.

• Non-Association – Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Association. Select the required primary VLAN from the scroll-down box, highlight one or more community VLANs in the Non-Association list box, and click Add to associate these entries with the selected primary VLAN. (A community

VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN.)

Figure 3-69 Private VLAN Association

3-160

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary

VLAN 5.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 6

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 7

Console(config-vlan)#

4-197

4-212

Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information

Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk

Information menus to display the interfaces associated with private

VLANs.

Command Attributes

• Port/Trunk – The switch interface.

• PVLAN Port Type – Displays private VLAN port types.

- Normal – The port is not configured in a private VLAN.

- Host – The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN, and with the designated promiscuous port(s). Or the port is an isolated port that can only communicate with the lone promiscuous port within its own isolated VLAN.

- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN.

• Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.

• Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports.

• Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.

• Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)

3-161

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Information or Trunk

Information.

Figure 3-70 Private VLAN Port Information

CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and community VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.

Console#show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

4-216

-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------

5 primary Eth1/ 3

5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

Console#

3-162

Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces

Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk

Configuration menus to set the private VLAN interface type, and assign the interfaces to a private VLAN.

Command Attributes

• Port/Trunk – The switch interface.

• PVLAN Port Type – Sets the private VLAN port types.

- Normal – The port is not assigned to a private VLAN.

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

- Host – The port is a community port or an isolated port. A community port can communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated promiscuous port(s). An isolated port can only communicate with the single designated promiscuous port in the isolated VLAN; it cannot communicate with any other host ports.

- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within a private VLAN.

• Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs. If PVLAN type is “Promiscuous,” then specify the associated primary VLAN.

• Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports. Set PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” and then specify the associated Community VLAN.

• Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked. Set the PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” then specify an isolated VLAN by marking the check box for an “Isolated

VLAN,” and selecting the required VLAN from the drop-down box.

3-163

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Set the PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN. Assign promiscuous ports to a primary or isolated VLAN.

Assign host ports to a community or isolated VLAN. After all the ports have been configured, click Apply.

3-164

Figure 3-71 Private VLAN Port Configuration

CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

4-213

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 5

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4

Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host

4-215

4-214

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6 4-214

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6

Console(config-if)#

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Class of Service Configuration

Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Layer 2 Queue Settings

Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces

You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch.

All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.

Command Usage

• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses

Weighted Round Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.

• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.

• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.

3-165

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Command Attributes

•

Default Priority

– The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface. (Range: 0-7, Default: 0)

• Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for each port.

Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority.

Modify the default priority for any interface, then click Apply.

Figure 3-72 Port Priority Configuration

CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3

Information of Eth 1/3

Broadcast threshold: Disabled

LACP status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Enabled

Acceptable frame type: Tagged frames only

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 5

GVRP status: Disabled

Allowed VLAN: 1(u),

Forbidden VLAN:

Private-VLAN mode: NONE

Private-VLAN host-association: NONE

Private-VLAN mapping: NONE

Console#

13. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”

3-166

4-224

4-155

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues

This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using four priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.

Table 3-10 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues

Queue

Priority

1,2

0,3

4,5

6,7

1,2

0,3

4,5

6,7

Serviced by weighted round robin

The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network.

Priority Level

0 (default)

Table 3-11 CoS Priority Levels

Traffic Type

Background

(Spare)

Best Effort

Excellent Effort

Controlled Load

Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter

Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter

Network Control

3-167

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Command Attributes

• Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)

•

Traffic Class

– Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the highest CoS priority queue)

Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. The current mapping of CoS values to output queues is displayed. Assign priorities to the traffic classes (i.e., output queues), then click Apply.

Figure 3-73 Traffic Classes

CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3

Console#

described in “Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-167, the

4-226

4-228

Note: Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

14. CLI shows Queue ID.

3-168

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Selecting the Queue Mode

You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.

Command Attributes

• WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 through 3 respectively. (This is the default selection.)

• Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.

Figure 3-74 Queue Mode

CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.

Console(config)#queue mode wrr

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue mode

4-223

4-227

Queue mode: wrr

Console#

3-169

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes

This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue. As

traffic classes are mapped to one of the four egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.

Command Attributes

•

WRR Setting Table

– Displays a list of weights for each traffic class

(i.e., queue).

• Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class.

However, note that Queue 0 is fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)

Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Highlight a traffic class (i.e., output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.

15. CLI shows Queue ID.

3-170

Figure 3-75 Configuring Queue Scheduling

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues.

Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue bandwidth

Queue ID Weight

-------- ------

0 1

1 6

2 9

3 12

Console

4-225

4-227

Layer 3/4 Priority Settings

Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values

This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service

(ToS) octet or the number of the TCP port. If priority bits are used, the

ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.

Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, and then Default Port Priority.

• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other.

3-171

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority

The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority. Select one of the methods or disable this feature.

Command Attributes

• Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)

• IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.

• IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services

Code Point Mapping.

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select

Disabled, IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu, then click Apply.

3-172

Figure 3-76 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status

CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#

4-230

Mapping IP Precedence

The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic.

The default IP Precedence values are mapped one-to-one to Class of

Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0, and so forth).

Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Table 3-12 Mapping IP Precedence

Priority Level Traffic Type

7 Network Control

Internetwork Control

Critical

Flash Override

Priority Level Traffic Type

3 Flash

Immediate

Priority

Routine

Command Attributes

• IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP

Precedence value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP

Precedence Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.

Figure 3-77 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values

3-173

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-174

CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch, maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP Precedence settings.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1

Precedence mapping status: enabled

4-230

4-232

4-236

Port Precedence COS

--------- ---------- ---

Eth 1/ 1 0 0

Eth 1/ 1 1 0

Eth 1/ 1 2 2

Eth 1/ 1 3 3

Eth 1/ 1 4 4

Eth 1/ 1 5 5

Eth 1/ 1 6 6

Eth 1/ 1 7 7

Console#

Note: Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

Mapping DSCP Priority

The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices, will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.

Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.

Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values

IP DSCP Value

10, 12, 14, 16

CoS Value

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Table 3-13 Mapping DSCP Priority Values (Continued)

IP DSCP Value

18, 20, 22, 24

26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36

38, 40, 42

46, 56

CoS Value

Command Attributes

• DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP

Priority value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.

Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.

Figure 3-78 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values

3-175

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-176

CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch, maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority settings.

Console(config)#map ip dscp

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1

DSCP mapping status: enabled

4-233

the CoS values to output queues, see page 3-167.

4-233

4-237

Port DSCP COS

--------- ---- ---

Eth 1/ 1 0 0

Eth 1/ 1 1 0

Eth 1/ 1 2 0

Eth 1/ 1 3 0

Eth 1/ 1 61 0

Eth 1/ 1 62 0

Eth 1/ 1 63 0

Console#

Note: Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

Mapping IP Port Priority

You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header.

Some of the more common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80,

FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.

Command Attributes

• IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.

• IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.

• IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.

• Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that

“0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Note: IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces.

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to

Enabled.

Figure 3-79 IP Port Priority Status

Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, and then click Apply.

Figure 3-80 IP Port Priority

3-177

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch, maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0, and then displays all the IP Port Priority settings for that port.

Console(config)#map ip port

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5

TCP port mapping status: enabled

4-230

Port Port no. COS

--------- -------- ---

Eth 1/ 5 80 0

Console#

Note: Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

Mapping CoS Values to ACLs

Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table. Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet itself. For information on mapping

Table 3-14 Egress Queue Priority Mapping

Queue

Priority

1,2

0,3

4,5

6,7

Command Attributes

• Port – Port identifier.

•

Name

– Name of ACL.

• Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).

16.

For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-77.

3-178

LASS OF

ERVICE

ONFIGURATION

• CoS Priority – CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule.

(Range: 0-7)

• ACL CoS Priority Mapping – Displays the configured information.

Web – Click Priority, ACL CoS Priority. Enable mapping for any port, select an ACL from the scroll-down list, then click Add.

Figure 3-81 ACL CoS Priority

CLI – This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 24.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24

Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0

Console(config-if)#

(page 3-181) to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast

4-126

3-179

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Multicast Filtering

Multicasting is used to support real-time applications such as videoconferencing or streaming audio. A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each client. It merely broadcasts its service to the network, and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch/router. Although this approach reduces the network overhead required by a multicast server, the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch/router it passes through to ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service.

Unicast

Flow

Multicast

Flow

This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service. This procedure is called multicast filtering.

The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet (VLAN).

3-180

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)

IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query

clients and servers, and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.

Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the

IGMP querier, you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch) connected over the network to an interface on

your switch (page 3-185). This interface will then join all the current

multicast groups supported by the attached router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch.

Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to

specific interfaces on the switch (page 3-188).

Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters

You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently.

Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance.

Command Usage

• IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures the multicast filters accordingly.

3-181

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-182

• IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

Command Attributes

• IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping. (Default: Enabled)

• Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the

Querier, which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. (Default: Enabled)

• IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group. (Range: 2-10; Default: 2)

• IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds;

Default: 125)

• IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP

Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list.

(Range: 5-25 seconds; Default: 10)

• IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving query packets) to have expired.

(Range: 300-500 seconds; Default: 300)

ULTICAST

ILTERING

• IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)

Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.

2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including

IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout.

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)

Figure 3-82 IGMP Configuration

3-183

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the current status.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100

4-239

4-243

4-244

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20

4-245

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300 4-246

4-240

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping

Service status: Enabled

Querier status: Enabled

Query count: 10

Query interval: 100 sec

Query max response time: 20 sec

Router port expire time: 300 sec

IGMP snooping version: Version 2

Console#

4-241

Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router

Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as

DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.

You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

• Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.

3-184

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.

Figure 3-83 Multicast Router Port Information

CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router.

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

---- ------------------ -------

1 Eth 1/11 Static

Console#

4-248

Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router

Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

3-185

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router.

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration.

Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic, and then click

Add. After you have finished adding interfaces to the list, click Apply.

Figure 3-84 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration

CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within

VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11 4-247

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

---- ------------------ -------

1 Eth 1/11 Static

Console#

4-248

Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services

You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service.

3-186

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.

• Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.

ULTICAST

ILTERING

• Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a

VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.

Figure 3-85 IP Multicast Registration Table

CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1, along with the ports propagating the corresponding services.

The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.

Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER

1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP

Console#

4-241

3-187

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Assigning Ports to Multicast Services

Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP snooping and Query Parameters” on page 3-133. For certain applications that require tighter control, you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group.

Command Usage

• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.

• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific

VLAN, the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router/switch.

• Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/ switch.

3-188

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router), indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 3-86 IGMP Member Port Table

CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12 ethernet 1/11

Console(config)#exit

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/11 User

1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP

Console#

4-239

4-241

3-189

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-190

HAPTER

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Using the Command Line Interface

Accessing the CLI

When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.

Console Connection

To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:

1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of

“admin” and “guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered, the CLI displays the

“Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode (i.e., Normal

Exec).

2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

4-1

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:

User Access Verification

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the SMC6726AL2 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Telnet Connection

Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion. For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, with subnet mask 255.255.255.0, consists of a network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).

Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.

To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet. For example,

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254

If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address.

However, if you are attached to an isolated network, then you can use any

IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached.

After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps:

1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access.

4-2

SING THE

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal

Exec), where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session.

3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the SMC6726AL2 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Vty-0#

Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.

4-3

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Entering Commands

This section describes how to enter CLI commands.

Keywords and Arguments

A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show

interfaces and status are keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5 specifies the unit/port.

You can enter commands as follows:

• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.

• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup configuration, enter:

Console>enable

Console#show startup-config

• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator, enter:

Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith

Minimum Abbreviation

The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.

4-4

NTERING

OMMANDS

Command Completion

If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the

“logging history” example, typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”

Getting Help on Commands

You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list keywords or parameters.

4-5

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Showing Commands

If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or

Privileged Exec) or configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line or

VLAN Database). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command “show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:

Console#show ?

access-group Access groups

access-list Access lists

bridge-ext Bridge extension information

calendar Date and time information

dot1x 802.1X content

garp GARP properties

gvrp GVRP interface information

history History information

interfaces Interface information

ip IP information

lacp LACP statistic

line TTY line information

log Login records

logging Login setting

mac MAC access list

mac-address-table Configuration of the address table

management Management IP filter

map Maps priority

port Port Characteristics

public-key Public Key information

queue Priority queue information

radius-server RADIUS server information

rate-limit Configures rate-limits

running-config Information on the running configuration

snmp Simple Network Management Protocol statistics

sntp Simple Network Time Protocol configuration

spanning-tree Spanning-tree configuration

ssh Secure shell server connections

startup-config Startup system configuration

system System Information

tacacs-server TACACS server settings

users Information about terminal lines

version System hardware and software versions

vlan Virtual LAN settings

Console#show

4-6

NTERING

OMMANDS

The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:

Console#show interfaces ?

counters Interface counters information

status Interface status information

switchport Interface switchport information

Console#

Partial Keyword Lookup

If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”

Console#show s?

snmp sntp spanning-tree ssh startup-config system

Console#show s

Negating the Effect of Commands

For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands.

Using Command History

The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then executed.

Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands.

4-7

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Understanding Command Modes

The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters. Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes. Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table:

Table 4-1 Command Modes

Class

Exec

Mode

Normal

Privileged

Configuration

Global

Access Control List

Interface

Line

VLAN Database

* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.

You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.

Exec Commands

When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt.

Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode

(or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter

Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the

enable command, followed by the privileged level password “super”

(page 4-36).

4-8

NTERING

OMMANDS

To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:

Username: admin

Password: [admin login password]

CLI session with the SMC6726AL2 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Username: guest

Password: [guest login password]

CLI session with the SMC6726AL2 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console>enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Configuration Commands

Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile storage, use the copy running-config

startup-config command.

The configuration commands are organized into different modes:

• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration, and include commands such as hostname and

snmp-server community.

• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.

• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as speed-duplex and negotiation.

• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and

Telnet configuration, and include command such as parity and

databits.

4-9

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.

To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode. The system prompt will change to

“Console(config)#” which gives you access privilege to all Global

Configuration commands.

Console#configure

Console(config)#

To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the

Privileged Exec mode.

Table 4-2 Configuration Modes

Mode

Line

Access

Control

List

Command

line {console | vty} access-list ip standard access-list ip extended access-list mac

Interface interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id}

VLAN vlan database

Prompt

Console(config-line)#

Console(config-std-acl)

Console(config-ext-acl)

Console(config-mac-acl)

Console(config-if)#

Console(config-vlan)

Page

For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#

4-10

NTERING

OMMANDS

Command Line Processing

Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command-line processing:

Keystroke

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-B

Ctrl-C

Ctrl-E

Ctrl-F

Ctrl-K

Ctrl-L

Ctrl-N

Ctrl-P

Ctrl-R

Ctrl-U

Ctrl-W

Esc-B

Esc-D

Esc-F

Delete key or backspace key

Table 4-3 Command Line Processing

Function

Shifts cursor to start of command line.

Shifts cursor to the left one character.

Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.

Shifts cursor to end of command line.

Shifts cursor to the right one character.

Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Enters the next command line in the history buffer.

Enters the last command.

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Deletes the last word typed.

Moves the cursor back one word.

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.

Moves the cursor forward one word.

Erases a mistake when entering a command.

4-11

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Groups

The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below

Table 4-4 Command Groups

Command Group Description

Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet, including baud rate and console time-out

General

System

Management

Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the system, or quitting the CLI

Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser management options, and a variety of other system information

Manages code image or switch configuration files Flash/File

Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote authentication; also configures port security and

IEEE 802.1X port access control

Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC address or

Ethernet type)

SNMP Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering

Interface

Mirror Port

Rate Limiting

Configures the connection parameters for all

Ethernet ports, aggregated links, and VLANs

Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port

Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port

Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures Link Aggregation Control

Protocol for port trunks

Page

4-12

OMMAND

ROUPS

Table 4-4 Command Groups (Continued)

Command Group Description

Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time

Spanning Tree

VLANs

Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch

Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN groups; also enables or configures private VLANs

GVRP and

Bridge Extension

Priority

Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic

VLAN learning; shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB

Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for TCP/UDP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP

Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, and specifies ports attached to a multicast router

IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch

Page

The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:

NE (Normal Exec)

PE (Privileged Exec)

GC (Global Configuration)

ACL (Access Control List Configuration)

IC (Interface Configuration)

LC (Line Configuration)

VC (VLAN Database Configuration)

4-13

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Line Commands

You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).

Table 4-5 Line Commands

Command

line login password timeout login response exec-timeout parity* speed* stopbits*

Function

Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line configuration mode

Enables password checking at login

Specifies a password on a line

Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI

Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user input is detected password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of failed logon attempts silent-time* Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command databits* Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by hardware

Defines the generation of a parity bit

Sets the terminal baud rate

Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte disconnect show line

Terminates a line connection

Displays a terminal line's parameters

Mode Page

NE,

* These commands only apply to the serial port.

4-14

INE

OMMANDS

line

This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent line configuration commands.

Syntax

line {console | vty}

• console - Console terminal line.

• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

There is no default line.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as

“Vty” in screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.

Example

To enter console line mode, enter the following command:

Console(config)#line console

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

show line (4-25)

show users (4-84)

4-15

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

login

This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password.

Syntax

login [local]

no login

local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command.

Default Setting

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:

- login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command. When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

- login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec

(NE) or Privileged Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15 respectively).

- no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.

4-16

INE

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

username (4-35)

password (4-17)

password

This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the password.

Syntax

password {0 | 7} password

no password

• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password

• password - Character string that specifies the line password.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

No password is specified.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the

4-17

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (4-20)

timeout login response

This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

timeout login response [seconds]

no timeout login response

seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.

(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)

Default Setting

• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)

• Telnet: 600 seconds

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is terminated for the session.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.

• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.

4-18

INE

OMMANDS

Example

To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

silent-time (4-21)

exec-timeout (4-14)

exec-timeout

This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

exec-timeout [seconds]

no exec-timeout

seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.

(Range: 0-65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)

Default Setting

• CLI: No timeout

• Telnet: 10 minutes

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open; otherwise the session is terminated.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.

• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.

4-19

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

silent-time (4-21)

timeout login response (4-13)

password-thresh

This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.

Syntax

password-thresh [threshold]

no password-thresh

threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.

(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)

Default Setting

The default value is three attempts.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt. (Use the silent-time command to set this interval.)

When this threshold is reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

4-20

INE

OMMANDS

Example

To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

silent-time (4-21)

timeout login response (4-13)

silent-time

This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.

Syntax

silent-time [seconds]

no silent-time

seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.

(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)

Default Setting

The default value is no silent-time.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Example

To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (4-20)

4-21

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

databits

This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax

databits {7 | 8}

no databits

• 7 - Seven data bits per character.

• 8 - Eight data bits per character.

Default Setting

8 data bits per character

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character.

Example

To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#databits 7

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

parity (4-23)

4-22

INE

OMMANDS

parity

This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

parity {none | even | odd}

no parity

• none - No parity

• even - Even parity

• odd - Odd parity

Default Setting

No parity

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting.

Example

To specify no parity, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#parity none

Console(config-line)#

speed

This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

speed bps

no speed

bps - Baud rate in bits per second.

(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)

4-23

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

9600

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.

Example

To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#speed 57600

Console(config-line)#

stopbits

This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

stopbits {1 | 2}

• 1 - One stop bit

• 2 - Two stop bits

Default Setting

1 stop bit

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Example

To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#stopbits 2

Console(config-line)#

4-24

INE

OMMANDS

disconnect

This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.

Syntax

disconnect session-id

session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console connection. (Range: 0-4)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection. Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection.

Example

Console#disconnect 1

Console#

Related Commands

show ssh (4-55)

show users (4-84)

show line

This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.

Syntax

show line [console | vty]

• console - Console terminal line.

• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

Shows all lines

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-25

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

To show all lines, enter this command:

Console#show line

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: Disabled

Baudrate: 9600

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

VTY configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 600 sec

General Commands

Table 4-6 General Commands

Command

enable disable configure

Function

Activates privileged mode

Mode

Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE

Activates global configuration mode PE show history Shows the command history buffer reload Restarts the system end Returns to Privileged Exec mode exit

Page

NE, PE

any config. mode any

quit help

Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI

Exits a CLI session

Shows how to use help

Shows options for command completion

(context sensitive)

NE, PE any any

4-31

4-26

ENERAL

OMMANDS

enable

This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional commands are available, and certain commands display

additional information. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-8.

Syntax

enable [level]

level - Privilege level to log into the device.

The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,

15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

Level 15

Command Mode

Normal Exec

Command Usage

• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password,

see the enable password command on page 4-36.)

• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode.

Example

Console>enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Related Commands

disable (4-28)

enable password (4-36)

4-27

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

disable

This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all

commands, you must use the privileged mode. See “Understanding

Command Modes” on page 4-8.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode.

Example

Console#disable

Console>

Related Commands

enable (4-27)

configure

This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global

Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN

Database Configuration. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-8.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-28

ENERAL

OMMANDS

Example

Console#configure

Console(config)#

Related Commands

end (4-30)

show history

This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and

10 Configuration commands.

Example

In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer:

Console#show history

Execution command history:

2 config

1 show history

Configuration command history:

4 interface vlan 1

3 exit

2 interface vlan 1

1 end

Console#

4-29

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer (config).

Console#!2

Console#config

Console(config)#

reload

This command restarts the system.

Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On

Self-Test. It will also retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy running-config startup-config command.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command resets the entire system.

Example

This example shows how to reset the switch:

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

end

This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

None

4-30

ENERAL

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and

VLAN Database Configuration.

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the

Interface Configuration mode:

Console(config-if)#end

Console#

exit

This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Any

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the

Global Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:

Console(config)#exit

Console#exit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

quit

This command exits the configuration program.

Default Setting

None

4-31

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.

Example

This example shows how to quit a CLI session:

Console#quit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

System Management Commands

These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.

Table 4-7 System Management Commands

Command Group Function

Device

Designation

User Access

Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch

Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access

IP Filter

Web Server

Telnet Server

Secure Shell

Event Logging

Time (System

Clock)

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access

Enables management access via a web browser

Enables management access via Telnet

Provides secure replacement for Telnet

Controls logging of error messages

Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually

Page

4-32

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Table 4-7 System Management Commands (Continued)

Command Group Function

System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information

Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames

Page

4-78

4-85

Device Designation Commands

Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands

Command Function

prompt

Mode Page

Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC

4-33

hostname snmp-server contact snmp-server location

Specifies the host name for the switch

Sets the system contact string

Sets the system location string

4-34

4-138

prompt

This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default prompt.

Syntax

prompt string

no prompt

string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

Console

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#prompt RD2

RD2(config)#

4-33

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

hostname

This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the

no form to restore the default host name.

Syntax

hostname name

no hostname

name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#hostname RD#1

Console(config)#

User Access Commands

The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section. This switch also includes other options for password checking via

the console or a Telnet connection (page 4-14), user authentication via a

remote authentication server (page 4-94), and host access authentication

for specific ports (page 4-107).

Table 4-9 User Access Commands

Command

username

Function

Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the

Privileged Exec level

Mode Page

4-35

4-36

4-34

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

username

This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.

Syntax

username name {access-level level | nopassword |

password {0 | 7} password}

no username name

• name - The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)

• access-level level - Specifies the user level.

The device has two predefined privilege levels:

0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.

• nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.

• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

• password password - The authentication password for the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

• The default access level is Normal Exec.

• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:

username

guest

Table 4-10 Default Login Settings access-level

password

guest admin 15 admin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-35

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user.

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

enable password

After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password. Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the default password.

Syntax

enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password

no enable password [level level]

• level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)

• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

• password - password for this privilege level. (Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

• The default is level 15.

• The default password is “super”

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-36

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec

with the enable command (page 4-27).

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin

Console(config)#

Related Commands

enable (4-27)

authentication enable (4-96)

IP Filter Commands

Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands

Command

management

Function

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser

Mode Page

4-38

4-39

4-37

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

management

This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client |

telnet-client} start-address [end-address]

• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.

• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.

• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.

• end-address - The end address of a range.

Default Setting

All addresses

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.

• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or

Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.

• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.

4-38

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address.

Example

This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console(config)#

show management

This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols.

Syntax

show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client |

telnet-client}

• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.

• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.

• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-39

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show management all-client

Management IP Filter

HTTP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

SNMP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

TELNET-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console#

Web Server Commands

Table 4-12 Web Server Commands

Command Function

ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface ip http secure-port

Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS

Mode

GC ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser ip http secure-server

Enables HTTPS for encrypted communications GC

Page

4-41

4-42

4-43

4-40

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

ip http port

This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface. Use the no form to use the default port.

Syntax

ip http port port-number

no ip http port

port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip http port 769

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http server (4-41)

ip http server

This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip http server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-41

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#ip http server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http port (4-41)

ip http secure-server

This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip http secure-server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch. However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port.

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser: https://device[:port_number]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.

- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

4-42

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

• A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer

5.x and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.

• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support

HTTPS:

Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support

Web Browser

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later

Operating System

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP,

Solaris 2.6

• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default

Secure-site Certificate” on page 4-56. Also refer to the copy command

on page 4-87.

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-port (4-43)

copy tftp https-certificate (4-87)

ip http secure-port

This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.

Syntax

ip http secure-port port_number

no ip http secure-port

port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

443

4-43

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.

• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:

https://device:port_number

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-server (4-42)

Telnet Server Commands

Table 4-14 Telnet Server Commands

Command Function

ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet

Mode Page

4-44

4-45

ip telnet port

This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the no form to use the default port.

Syntax

ip telnet port port-number

no ip telnet port

port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.

(Range: 1-65535)

4-44

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip telnet port 123

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip telnet server (4-45)

ip telnet server

This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from

Telnet. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] ip telnet server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip telnet server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip telnet port (4-44)

4-45

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Secure Shell Commands

The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for

Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for

Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.

The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet. When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch uses a public-key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered.

This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server.

However, note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch.

Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.

Table 4-15 SSH Commands

Command

ip ssh server ip ssh timeout

Function

Enables the SSH server on the switch ip ssh authentication-retries

Specifies the authentication timeout for the

SSH server

Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size copy tftp public-key Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch delete public-key Deletes the public key for the specified user

Mode Page

4-46

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Table 4-15 SSH Commands (Continued)

Command

ip ssh crypto host-key generate

Function

Generates the host key ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM ip ssh save host-key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory disconnect show ip ssh

Terminates a line connection

Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values for authentication timeout and retries show ssh show public-key show users

Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE

Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host

Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type

Mode

Page

TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified by the

authentication login command on page 4-95. If public key

authentication is specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server.

To use the SSH server, complete these steps:

1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate

command to create a host public/private key pair.

4-47

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.

An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example:

10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254

15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233

76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206

519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397

1752646358058176716709574804776117

3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp

public-key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the

SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts

page as described on page 3-48.) The clients are subsequently

authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:

1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880

055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178

136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840

848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453

06393916643 [email protected]

4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.

5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the

SSH server on the switch.

6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access. The following exchanges take place during this process:

4-48

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

a. The client sends its public key to the switch.

b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.

c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.

d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch.

e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.

Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.

ip ssh server

This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no form to disable this service.

Syntax

[no] ip ssh server

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and

SSH sessions.

• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.

4-49

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa

Console#configure

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)

show ssh (4-55)

ip ssh timeout

This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

ip ssh timeout seconds

no ip ssh timeout

seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.

(Range: 1-120)

Default Setting

10 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the

exec-timeout command for vty sessions.

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60

Console(config)#

4-50

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Related Commands

exec-timeout (4-19)

show ip ssh (4-55)

ip ssh authentication-retries

This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

ip ssh authentication-retries count

no ip ssh authentication-retries

count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show ip ssh (4-55)

ip ssh server-key size

This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

ip ssh server-key size key-size

no ip ssh server-key size

key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)

4-51

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

768 bits

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.

• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512

Console(config)#

delete public-key

This command deletes the specified user’s public key.

Syntax

delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]

• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)

• dsa – DSA public key type.

• rsa – RSA public key type.

Default Setting

Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#delete public-key admin dsa

Console#

4-52

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

ip ssh crypto host-key generate

This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).

Syntax

ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]

• dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.

• rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.

Default Setting

Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the

ip ssh save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash

memory.

• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.

• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto zeroize (4-54) ip ssh save host-key (4-54)

4-53

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

ip ssh crypto zeroize

This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).

Syntax

ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]

• dsa – DSA key type.

• rsa – RSA key type.

Default Setting

Clears both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use

the no ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash

memory.

• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)

ip ssh save host-key (4-54)

no ip ssh server (4-49)

ip ssh save host-key

This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory.

Syntax

ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]

• dsa – DSA key type.

• rsa – RSA key type.

4-54

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Default Setting

Saves both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-53)

show ip ssh

This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip ssh

SSH Enabled - version 1.99

Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3

Server key size: 768 bits

Console#

show ssh

This command displays the current SSH server connections.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ssh

Connection Version State Username Encryption

0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

Console#

4-55

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Field

Session

Version

State

Username

Encryption

Table 4-16 show ssh - display description

Description

The session number. (Range: 0-3)

The Secure Shell version number.

The authentication negotiation state.

(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started,

Session-Started)

The user name of the client.

The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.

Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES

Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos) and server-to-client (stoc): aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1

3des-cbc-hmac-sha1 blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes128-cbc-hmac-md5 aes192-cbc-hmac-md5 aes256-cbc-hmac-md5

3des-cbc-hmac-md5 blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5

Terminology:

DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)

3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key) aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key) blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key) cbc – cypher-block chaining sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes) md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)

4-56

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show public-key

This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.

Syntax

show public-key [user [username]| host]

username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)

Default Setting

Shows all public keys.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are displayed.

• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent

(e.g., 35), and the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.

4-57

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show public-key host

Host:

RSA:

1024 35

1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593

1998685443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680

1726272571413428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194

1746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545

24083971752646358058176716709574804776117

DSA: ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/

Dg0h2HxcYV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUWa4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2

XFfAKxl5fwFfvJlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRA

AAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZ vH+p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfTyyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNO xrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOyDbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkT

LZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2odVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm

8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 w0W

Console#

4-58

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Event Logging Commands

Table 4-17 Event Logging Commands

Command

logging on

Function

Controls logging of error messages logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer show logging Displays the state of logging show log Displays log messages

Mode Page

logging on

This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.

Syntax

[no] logging on

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory.

You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored.

4-59

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#

Related Commands

logging history (4-60)

clear logging (4-64)

logging history

This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity. The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.

Syntax

logging history {flash | ram} level

no logging history {flash | ram}

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

• level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)

Table 4-18 Logging Levels

Level Severity Name Description

7 debugging Debugging messages informational notifications

Informational messages only

Normal but significant condition, such as cold start

3 warnings errors

Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)

Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)

2 critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

4-60

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Table 4-18 Logging Levels (Continued)

Level Severity Name

0 alerts emergencies

Description

Immediate action needed

System unusable

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

Default Setting

Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)

RAM: warnings (level 6 - 0)

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority

(i.e., numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.

Example

Console(config)#logging history ram 0

Console(config)#

logging host

This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.

Syntax

[no] logging host host_ip_address

host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-61

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host

IP addresses.

• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.

Example

Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3

Console(config)#

logging facility

This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.

Use the no form to return the type to the default.

Syntax

[no] logging facility type

type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages.

(See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database.

Example

Console(config)#logging facility 19

Console(config)#

4-62

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

logging trap

This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity.

Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to disable remote logging.

Syntax

logging trap [level]

no logging trap

level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on

page 4-60.)

Default Setting

• Enabled

• Level 6 - 0

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved.

• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but restores the minimum severity level to the default.

Example

Console(config)#logging trap 4

Console(config)#

4-63

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

clear logging

This command clears messages from the log buffer.

Syntax

clear logging [flash | ram]

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

Default Setting

Flash and RAM

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear logging

Console#

Related Commands

show logging (4-64)

show logging

This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.

Syntax

show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}

• flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory

(i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary

RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

• sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler

(page 4-71).

• trap - Displays settings for the trap function.

4-64

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is “informational” (i.e., default level 6 - 0).

Console#show logging flash

Syslog logging: Enabled

History logging in FLASH: level errors

Console#show logging ram

Syslog logging: Enabled

History logging in RAM: level informational

Console#

Table 4-19 show logging flash/ram - display description

Field

Syslog logging

History logging in

FLASH

History logging in

RAM

Description

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.

4-65

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

The following example displays settings for the trap function.

Console#show logging trap

Syslog logging: Enabled

REMOTELOG status: Enabled

REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7

REMOTELOG level type: Informational messages only

REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0

Console#

Table 4-20 show logging trap - display description

Field

Syslog logging

REMOTELOG status

REMOTELOG facility type

REMOTELOG level type

REMOTELOG server IP address

Description

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging

trap command.

The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility command.

The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command.

The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.

Related Commands

show logging sendmail (4-71)

4-66

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show log

This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory.

Syntax

show log {flash | ram} [login] [tail]

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

• tail - Shows event history starting from the most recent entry.

• login - Shows the login record only.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command shows the system and event messages stored in

memory, including the time stamp, message level (page 4-60), program

module, function, and event number.

Example

The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM.

Console#show log ram

[5] 00:01:06 2001-01-01

"STA root change notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[4] 00:01:00 2001-01-01

"STA root change notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[3] 00:00:54 2001-01-01

"STA root change notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[2] 00:00:50 2001-01-01

"STA topology change notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[1] 00:00:48 2001-01-01

"VLAN 1 link-up notification."

level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1

Console#

4-67

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

SMTP Alert Commands

These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.

Table 4-21 SMTP Alert Commands

Command

logging sendmail host logging sendmail level logging sendmail source-email logging sendmail destination-email

Function

SMTP servers to receive alert messages

Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages

Email address used for “From” field of alert messages

Email recipients of alert messages logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling show logging sendmail

Displays SMTP event handler settings

Mode Page

NE,

logging sendmail host

This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages.

Use the no form to remove an SMTP server.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail host ip_address

ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing.

However, you must enter a separate command to specify each server.

4-68

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.

• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command. If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection.)

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200

Console(config)#

logging sendmail level

This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.

Syntax

logging sendmail level level

level - One of the system message levels (page 4-60). Messages sent

include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)

Default Setting

Level 7

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)

Example

This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through

Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4

Console(config)#

4-69

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

logging sendmail source-email

This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages. Use the no form to delete the source email address.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail source-email email-address

email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 0-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch.

Example

This example will set the source email [email protected].

Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email [email protected]

Console(config)#

logging sendmail destination-email

This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to remove a recipient.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address

email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 1-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

4-70

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient.

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email [email protected]

Console(config)#

logging sendmail

This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[no] logging sendmail

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail

Console(config)#

show logging sendmail

This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-71

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show logging sendmail

SMTP servers

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.200

SMTP minimum severity level: 4

SMTP destination email addresses

-----------------------------------------------

1. [email protected]

SMTP source email address: [email protected]

SMTP status: Enabled

Console#

Time Commands

The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers (NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.

Table 4-22 Time Commands

Command

sntp client sntp server sntp poll show sntp

Function

Accepts time from specified time servers

Specifies one or more time servers GC

Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC

Shows current SNTP configuration settings

Mode Page

4-73

NE,

4-74

4-75

clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC calendar set Sets the system date and time PE show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE,

4-76

4-77

4-78

4-72

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

sntp client

This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests.

Syntax

[no] sntp client

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e.,

00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).

• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#end

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002

Poll interval: 60

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status: Enabled

SNTP server: 10.1.0.19 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Current server: 10.1.0.19

Console#

Related Commands

sntp server (4-74)

sntp poll (4-75) show sntp (4-75)

4-73

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

sntp server

This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list.

Syntax

sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]

ip - IP address of a time server (NTP or SNTP).

(Range: 1-3 addresses)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp

poll command.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console(config)#

Related Commands

sntp client (4-73)

sntp poll (4-75) show sntp (4-75)

4-74

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

sntp poll

This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.

Syntax

sntp poll seconds

no sntp poll

seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)

Default Setting

16 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console(config)#

Related Commands

sntp client (4-73)

show sntp

This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the

SNTP client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode

(i.e., unicast).

4-75

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002

Poll interval: 16

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status : Enabled

SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Current server: 137.92.140.80

Console#

clock timezone

This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.

Syntax

clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc |

after-utc}

• name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)

• hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours)

• minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)

• before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.

• after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated

Universal Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of

UTC.

4-76

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show sntp (4-75)

calendar set

This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server.

Syntax

calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}

• hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)

• min - Minute. (Range: 0-59)

• sec - Second. (Range: 0-59)

• day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)

august | september | october | november | december

• year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001-2100)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, April 1st,

2004.

Console#calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004

Console#

4-77

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show calendar

This command displays the system clock.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show calendar

15:12:45 April 1 2004

Console#

System Status Commands

Table 4-23 System Status Commands

Command

show startup-config

Function

Displays the contents of the configuration file

(stored in flash memory) that is used to start up the system

Mode

PE show running-config

Displays the configuration data currently in use PE show system Displays system information NE,

PE show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system

NE,

Page

4-78

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show startup-config

This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is used to start up the system.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory.

• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:

- SNMP community strings

- Users (names and access levels)

- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

- VLAN configuration settings for each interface

- IP address configured for the switch

- Spanning tree settings

- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

4-79

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show startup-config building startup-config, please wait.....

username admin access-level 15 username admin password 0 admin

username guest access-level 0 username guest password 0 guest

enable password level 15 0 super

snmp-server community public ro snmp-server community private rw

logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

switchport native vlan 1

interface vlan 1

ip address dhcp

line console

line VTY

end

Console#

Related Commands

show running-config (4-81)

4-80

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show running-config

This command displays the configuration information currently in use.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory.

- MAC address for each switch in the stack

- SNTP server settings

- SNMP community strings

- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)

- Event log settings

- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

- VLAN configuration settings for each interface

- IP address configured for the switch

- Layer 4 precedence settings

- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

4-81

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

4-82

Example

Console#show running-config building running-config, please wait.....

phymap 00-30-f1-d3-26-00

SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after-UTC

SNMP-server community private rw

SNMP-server community public ro

username admin access-level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access-level 0

username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca logging history ram 6 logging history flash 3

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

switchport native vlan 1

interface vlan 1

IP address DHCP

no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP

line console

line VTY

end

Console#

Related Commands

show startup-config (4-79)

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show system

This command displays system information.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to

“Displaying System Information” on page -11.

• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates “FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.

Example

Console#show system

System description: TigerSwitch 10/100 6726AL2

System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.46

System information

System Up time: 3 hours, 0 minutes, and 7.18 seconds

System Name: [NONE]

System Location: [NONE]

System Contact: [NONE]

MAC address: 00-30-F1-D3-26-00

Web server: enabled

Web server port: 80

Web secure server: enabled

Web secure server port: 443

Telnet server : enable

Telnet port : 23

Jumbo Frame : Disabled

POST result

DUMMY Test 1.................PASS

UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS

DRAM Test....................PASS

Timer Test...................PASS

Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS

Done All Pass.

Console#

4-83

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show users

Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet client.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to the Line (i.e., session) index number.

Example

Console#show users

Username accounts:

Username Privilege Public-Key

-------- --------- ----------

admin 15 None

guest 0 None

steve 15 RSA

Online users:

Line Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.

----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------

0 console admin 0:14:14

* 1 VTY 0 admin 0:00:00 192.168.1.19

2 SSH 1 steve 0:00:06 192.168.1.19

Web online users:

Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).

----------- -------------- -------- ------------------

1 HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00

Console#

show version

This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.

Default Setting

None

4-84

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 3-13 for

detailed information on the items displayed by this command.

Example

Console#show version

Unit 1

Serial number: A419048860

Service tag:

Hardware version: R0B

Module A type: 1000BaseT

Module B type: 1000BaseT

Number of ports: 26

Main power status: up

Redundant power status: not present

Agent(master)

Unit ID: 1

Loader version: 2.2.1.4

Boot ROM version: 2.2.1.9

Operation code version: 2.2.6.3

Console#

Frame Size Commands

Command

jumbo frame

Table 4-24 Frame Size Commands

Function

Enables support for jumbo frames

Mode Page

4-85

jumbo frame

This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] jumbo frame

Default Setting

Disabled

4-85

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes.

Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields.

• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes

(such as a computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames.

• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second. (See the switchport

broadcast command on page 4-150.)

• The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show

system command (page 4-83).

Example

Console(config)#jumbo frame

Console(config)#

Flash/File Commands

These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.

Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands

Command Function

copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash memory or a TFTP server delete dir

Deletes a file or code image

Displays a list of files in flash memory

Mode Page

TFTP server. (See “Secure Shell Commands” on page 4-46.)

4-90

4-91

4-86

LASH

ILE

OMMANDS

Table 4-25 Flash/File Commands (Continued)

Command Function

whichboot Displays the files booted boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system

Mode

Page

4-92

4-93

copy

This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection.

Syntax

copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp | unit}

copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}

copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}

copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config |

https-certificate | public-key}

copy unit file

• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.

• running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current running configuration.

• startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.

• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.

• https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch.

• public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a

• unit - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a unit.

Default Setting

None

4-87

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.

• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,

“.”, “-”, “_”)

• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation code files.

• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on available memory.

• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.

• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the destination.

• Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the stack. Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in the stack.

• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware, or contact your distributor for help.

• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see See “Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-56.. For information on

configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection, see See

“ip http secure-server” on page 4-42..

4-88

LASH

ILE

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server:

Console#copy file tftp

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1

Source file name: startup

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Destination file name: startup.01

TFTP completed.

Success.

Console#

The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.

Console#copy running-config file destination file name: startup

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

The following example shows how to download a configuration file:

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Source configuration file name: startup.01

Startup configuration file name [startup]:

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Source certificate file name: SS-certificate

Source private file name: SS-private

Private password: ********

Success.

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

4-89

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP server. Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch:

Console#copy tftp public-key

TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19

Choose public key type:

1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1

Source file name: steve.pub

Username: steve

TFTP Download

Success.

Write to FLASH Programming.

Success.

Console#

delete

This command deletes a file or image.

Syntax

delete [unit:] filename

filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.

unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.

• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.

• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.

4-90

LASH

ILE

OMMANDS

Example

This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory for unit 1.

Console#delete 1:test2.cfg

Console#

Related Commands

dir (4-91)

delete public-key (4-52)

dir

This command displays a list of files in flash memory.

Syntax

dir [unit:] {{boot-rom: | config: | opcode:} [:filename]}

The type of file or image to display includes:

• boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.

• config - Switch configuration file.

• opcode - Run-time operation code image file.

• filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.

• unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all files.

• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.

4-91

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• File information is shown below:

Column Heading

file name file type startup size

Table 4-26 File Directory Information

Description

The name of the file.

File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.

Shows if this file is used when the system is started.

The length of the file in bytes.

Example

The following example shows how to display all file information:

Console#dir 1:

file name file type startup size (byte)

---------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------

Unit1:

Diag_V2.2.1.3.bix Boot-Rom image Y 196020

V2.1.5.4.bix Operation Code N 1745120

V2.2.2.2.bix Operation Code Y 1745500

Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File N 5013

startup Config File Y 6023

------------------------------------------------------------------

Total free space: 340787

Console#

whichboot

This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.

Syntax whichboot

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-92

LASH

ILE

OMMANDS

Example

This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command.

Console#whichboot

file name file type startup size (byte)

---------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------

Unit1:

Diag_V2.2.1.3.bix Boot-Rom image Y 196020

V2.2.2.2.bix Operation Code Y 1745500

startup Config File Y 6023

------------------------------------------------------------------

Total free space: 340787

Console#

boot system

This command specifies the image used to start up the system.

Syntax

boot system [unit:] {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename

The type of file or image to set as a default includes:

• boot-rom* - Boot ROM.

• config* - Configuration file.

• opcode* - Run-time operation code.

• filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.

• unit* - Specifies the unit number. (This is unit 1)

* The colon (:) is required.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number and file type.

• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.

4-93

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#boot system config: startup

Console(config)#

Related Commands

dir (4-91)

whichboot (4-92)

Authentication Commands

You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods.

You can also enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1X.

Table 4-27 Authentication Commands

Command Group Function

Authentication

Sequence

RADIUS Client

Defines logon authentication method and precedence

Configures settings for authentication via a

RADIUS server

TACACS+ Client Configures settings for authentication via a

TACACS+ server

Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port

Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X

Page

Authentication Sequence

Table 4-28 Authentication Sequence

Command Function

authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for command mode change

Mode Page

4-95

4-96

4-94

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

authentication login

This command defines the login authentication method and precedence.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}

no authentication login

• local - Use local password.

• radius - Use RADIUS server password.

• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.

Default Setting

Local

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.

Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.

• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter

“authentication login radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the

TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local user name and password is checked.

4-95

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#

Related Commands

username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-35)

authentication enable

This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command

mode with the enable command (see page 4-27). Use the no form to

restore the default.

Syntax

authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}

no authentication enable

• local - Use local password only.

• radius - Use RADIUS server password only.

• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.

Default Setting

Local

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.

Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

4-96

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter

“authentication enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the

TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local user name and password is checked.

Example

Console(config)#authentication enable radius

Console(config)#

Related Commands

enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-36)

RADIUS Client

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Command

radius-server host radius-server port

Table 4-29 RADIUS Client Commands

Function Mode Page

Specifies the RADIUS server GC

Sets the RADIUS server network port GC

4-99

radius-server key radius-server retransmit

Sets the RADIUS encryption key

Sets the number of retries radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests show radius-server Shows the current RADIUS settings

4-99

4-100

4-101

4-97

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

radius-server host

This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to restore the default values.

Syntax

[no] radius-server index host {host_ip_address | host_alias}

[auth-port auth_port] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit]

[key key]

• index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.

• host_ip_address - IP address of server.

• host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

• timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)

• retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)

• key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.

Do not use blank spaces in the string.

(Maximum length: 20 characters)

Default Setting

• auth-port - 1812

• timeout - 5 seconds

• retransmit - 2

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 auth-port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green

Console(config)#

4-98

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

radius-server port

This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server port port_number

no radius-server port

port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

1812

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#

radius-server key

This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server key key_string

no radius-server key

key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-99

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#

radius-server retransmit

This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server retransmit number_of_retries

no radius-server retransmit

number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#

radius-server timeout

This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

radius-server timeout number_of_seconds

no radius-server timeout

number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

4-100

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console(config)#

show radius-server

This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show radius-server

Remote RADIUS server configuration:

Global settings

Communication key with RADIUS server:

Server port number: 1812

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Sever 1:

Server IP address: 192.168.1.1

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 181

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Console#

4-101

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

TACACS+ Client

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Table 4-30 TACACS Commands

Command Function

tacacs-server host Specifies the TACACS+ server tacacs-server port Specifies the TACACS+ server network port

Mode

GC tacacs-server key Sets the TACACS+ encryption key GC show tacacs-server Shows the current TACACS+ settings GC

Page

4-102

4-103

4-104

tacacs-server host

This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

tacacs-server host host_ip_address

no tacacs-server host

host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

10.11.12.13

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#

4-102

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

tacacs-server port

This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

tacacs-server port port_number

no tacacs-server port

port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181

Console(config)#

tacacs-server key

This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

tacacs-server key key_string

no tacacs-server key

key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.

(Maximum length: 20 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-103

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console(config)#

show tacacs-server

This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show tacacs-server

Remote TACACS server configuration:

Server IP address: 10.11.12.13

Communication key with TACACS server: *****

Server port number: 49

Console#

Port Security Commands

These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network.

The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message.

4-104

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command

port security mac-address-table static show mac-address-table

Table 4-31 Port Security Commands

Function

Configures a secure port

Mode Page

Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC

4-105

4-178

Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database

4-179

port security

This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses.

Syntax

port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}

| max-mac-count address-count]

no port security [action | max-mac-count]

• action - Response to take when port security is violated.

- shutdown - Disable port only.

- trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.

- trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.

• max-mac-count

- address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port. (Range: 0-1024)

Default Setting

• Status: Disabled

• Action: None

• Maximum Addresses: 0

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

4-105

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted.

• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on the port.

• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.

• You can also manually add secure addresses with the

mac-address-table static command.

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

• Cannot use port monitoring.

• Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.

• Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.

• Cannot be a trunk port.

• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually

re-enabled using the no shutdown command.

Example

The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap

Related Commands

shutdown (4-149)

mac-address-table static (4-178)

show mac-address-table (4-179)

4-106

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

802.1X Port Authentication

The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible Authentication

Protocol).

Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication

Command

dot1x system-auth-control dot1x default

Function

Enables dot1x globally on the switch.

Mode

GC dot1x max-req dot1x port-control dot1x operation-mode

Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch retransmits an EAP request/ identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session

Sets dot1x mode for a port interface

Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port

IC dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports PE dot1x re-authentication

Enables re-authentication for all ports IC dot1x timeout quiet-period dot1x timeout re-authperiod

Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client

Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated

IC dot1x timeout tx-period show dot1x

Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet

Shows all dot1x related information

Page

4-107

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

dot1x system-auth-control

This command enables 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[no] system-auth-control

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control

Console(config)#

dot1x default

This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x default

Console(config)#

4-108

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

dot1x max-req count

no dot1x max-req

count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)

Default

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2

Console(config-if)#

dot1x port-control

This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}

no dot1x port-control

• auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

• force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

• force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

4-109

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default

force-authorized

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#

dot1x operation-mode

This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an

802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the default maximum count.

Syntax

dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count

count]}

no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]

• single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.

• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.

• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.

- count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.

(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)

Default

Single-host

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control

command (page 4-109).

4-110

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access.

Similarly, a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10

Console(config-if)#

dot1x re-authenticate

This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.

Syntax

dot1x re-authenticate [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-52)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#dot1x re-authenticate

Console#

dot1x re-authentication

This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports.

Use the no form to disable re-authentication.

Syntax

[no] dot1x re-authentication

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

4-111

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config-if)#

dot1x timeout quiet-period

This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request

Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to reset the default.

Syntax

dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds

no dot1x timeout quiet-period

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

60 seconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350

Console(config-if)#

dot1x timeout re-authperiod

This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated.

Syntax

dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds

no dot1x timeout re-authperiod

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

3600 seconds

4-112

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300

Console(config-if)#

dot1x timeout tx-period

This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to reset to the default value.

Syntax

dot1x timeout tx-period seconds

no dot1x timeout tx-period

seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

30 seconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300

Console(config-if)#

4-113

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show dot1x

This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface.

Syntax

show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]

• statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.

• interface

• ethernet unit/port

-unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

-port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the following information:

• Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch.

• 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for each interface, including the following items:

- Status – Administrative state for port access control.

- Operation Mode– Dot1x port control operation mode

(page 4-110).

- Mode

– Dot1x port control mode (page 4-109).

- Authorized – Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).

• 802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each interface, including the following items:

- reauth-enabled – Periodic re-authentication (page 4-111).

- reauth-period – Time after which a connected client must be

re-authenticated (page 4-112).

- quiet-period – Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new

client (page 4-112).

4-114

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

- tx-period – Time a port waits during authentication session before re-transmitting EAP packet

(page 4-113).

- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.

- server-timeout – Server timeout.

- reauth-max – Maximum number of reauthentication

- max-req attempts.

– Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the

- Status

authentication session (page 4-109).

– Authorization status (authorized or not).

- Operation Mode – Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients)

- Max Count can connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.

– The maximum number of hosts allowed to

access this port (page 4-110).

- Port-control – Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto, force-authorized, or force-unauthorized

(page 4-109).

- Supplicant – MAC address of authorized client.

- Current Identifier – The integer (0-255) used by the

Authenticator to identify the current authentication session.

• Authenticator State Machine

- State – Current state (including initialize, disconnected, connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting, held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).

- Reauth Count – Number of times connecting state is re-entered.

• Backend State Machine

- State – Current state (including request, response, success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).

- Request Count – Number of EAP Request packets sent to the

Supplicant without receiving a response.

- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP

Success, Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server.

4-115

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• Reauthentication State Machine

- State – Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).

Example

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes

1/26 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1/1

802.1X is enabled on port 1/2

reauth-enabled: Enable

reauth-period: 1800

quiet-period: 30

tx-period: 40

supplicant-timeout: 30

server-timeout: 10

reauth-max: 2

max-req: 5

Status Authorized

Operation mode Single-Host

Max count 5

Port-control Auto

Supplicant 00-00-e8-49-5e-dc

Current Identifier 3

Authenticator State Machine

State Authenticated

Reauth Count 0

Backend State Machine

State Idle

Request Count 0

Identifier(Server) 2

Reauthentication State Machine

State Initialize

802.1X is disabled on port 1/26

Console#

4-116

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Access Control List Commands

Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.

Access Control Lists

There are three filtering modes:

• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source

IP address.

• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the TCP protocol is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.

• MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).

The following restrictions apply to ACLs:

• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.

• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.

• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20.

4-117

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. You can only bind one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other words, only two ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.

The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:

1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.

Table 4-33 Access Control Lists

Command

Groups

IP ACLs

Function

MAC ACLs

Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP port number, protocol type, and TCP control code

Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and Ethernet type

ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port

Page

4-118

4-128

4-135

IP ACLs

Table 4-34 IP ACLs

Command Function

access-list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source

IP address permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including source and destination IP address,

TCP/UDP port number, protocol type, and

TCP control code

Mode

Page

4-119

STD-ACL 4-120

EXT-ACL 4-122

4-118

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Table 4-34 IP ACLs (Continued)

Command Function

show ip access-list

Mode

Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE

Adds a port to an IP ACL IC ip access-group show ip access-group

Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE map access-list ip show map access-list ip

Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets matching an ACL rule

Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface

Page

access-list ip

This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified

ACL.

Syntax

[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name

• standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address.

• extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-119

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL, use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list. To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.

• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule.

• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.

Example

Console(config)#access-list ip standard david

Console(config-std-acl)#

Related Commands

permit, deny 4-120

ip access-group (4-125)

show ip access-list (4-124)

permit, deny (Standard ACL)

This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}

• any – Any source IP address.

• source – Source IP address.

• bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.

• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Standard ACL

4-120

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• New rules are appended to the end of the list.

• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.

Example

This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.

Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

Console(config-std-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list ip (4-119)

4-121

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

permit, deny (Extended ACL)

This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes.

Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]

{any | source address-bitmask | host source}

{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}

[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]

[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]

[no] {permit | deny} tcp

{any | source address-bitmask | host source}

{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}

[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]

[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]

[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]

• protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)

• source – Source IP address.

• destination – Destination IP address.

• address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.

• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.

• precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)

• tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)

• dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)

• sport – Protocol

source port number. (Range: 0-65535)

• dport – Protocol

destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)

• end – Upper bound of the protocol port range. (Range: 0-65535)

• control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)

• flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.

(Range: 0-63)

17. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.

4-122

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Extended ACL

Command Usage

• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.

• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.

• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be specified:

- 1 (fin) – Finish

- 2 (syn) – Synchronize

- 4 (rst) – Reset

- 8 (psh) – Push

- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement

- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer

For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set:

SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”

Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”

SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”

4-123

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0

& 255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ext-acl)#

This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80

Console(config-ext-acl)#

This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the

TCP control code set to “SYN.”

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2

Console(config-ext-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list ip (4-119)

show ip access-list

This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.

Syntax

show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]

• standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.

• extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-124

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show ip access-list standard

IP standard access-list david:

permit host 10.1.1.21

permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

Console#

Related Commands

permit, deny 4-120

ip access-group (4-125)

ip access-group

This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax

[no] ip access-group acl_name in

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• A port can only be bound to one ACL.

• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different

ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

4-125

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#int eth 1/25

Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show ip access-list (4-124)

show ip access-group

This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip access-group

Interface ethernet 1/25

IP access-list david in

Console#

Related Commands

ip access-group (4-125)

map access-list ip

This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.

The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.

Syntax

[no] map access-list ip acl_name cos cos-value

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

None

4-126

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table. For information on

mapping the CoS values to output queues, see queue cos-map on page 4-226.

Table 4-35 Egress Queue Priority Mapping

Queue

0 1 2 3

Priority

1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25

Console(config-if)#map access-list ip david cos 0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

queue cos-map (4-226)

show map access-list ip (4-127)

show map access-list ip

This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.)

Syntax

show map access-list ip [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-127

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console#show map access-list ip

Eth 1/25

access-list ip david cos 0

Console#

Related Commands

map access-list ip (4-126)

MAC ACLs

Table 4-36 MAC ACLs

Command

access-list mac

Function

Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode

Mode

Page

4-128

permit, deny show mac access-list show map access-list mac

MAC-ACL 4-130

PE mac access-group Adds a port to a MAC ACL show mac access-group

Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE map access-list mac

Filters packets matching a specified source and destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type

Displays the rules for configured MAC

ACLs

Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets matching an

ACL rule

Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface

access-list mac

This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.

Syntax

[no] access-list mac acl_name

acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

4-128

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule.

• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.

Example

Console(config)#access-list mac jerry

Console(config-mac-acl)#

Related Commands

permit, deny (MAC ACL) (4-130)

mac access-group (4-132)

show mac access-list (4-131)

4-129

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

permit, deny (MAC ACL)

This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[no] {permit | deny}

{any | host source | source address-bitmask}

{any | host destination | destination address-bitmask}

[vid vid [vid-end]] [ethertype protocol [protocol-end]]

Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.

• any – Any MAC source or destination address.

• host – A specific MAC address.

• source – Source MAC address.

• destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.

• address-bitmask

– Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).

• vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)

• vid-end – Upper bound of VID range. (Range: 1-4094)

• protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 0-65535)

• protocol-end – Upper bound of protocol range. (Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

MAC ACL

Command Usage

• New rules are added to the end of the list.

• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.

18. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.

4-130

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC

1060. A few of the more common types include the following:

- 0800 - IP

- 0806 - ARP

- 8137 - IPX

Example

This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800

Console(config-mac-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list mac (4-128)

show mac access-list

This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.

Syntax

show mac access-list [acl_name]

acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac access-list

MAC access-list jerry:

permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800

Console#

Related Commands

permit, deny 4-130

mac access-group (4-132)

4-131

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

mac access-group

This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax

mac access-group acl_name in

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• A port can only be bound to one ACL.

• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different

ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25

Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show mac access-list (4-131)

show mac access-group

This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac access-group

Interface ethernet 1/25

MAC access-list jerry in

Console#

4-132

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Related Commands

mac access-group (4-132)

map access-list mac

This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.

The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.

Syntax

[no] map access-list mac acl_name cos cos-value

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.

• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below.

Table 4-37 Egress Queue Priority Mapping

Queue

0 1 2 3

Priority

1,2 0,3 4,5 6,7

Example

Console(config)#int eth 1/5

Console(config-if)#map access-list mac jerry cos 0

Console(config-if)#

4-133

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Related Commands

queue cos-map (4-226)

show map access-list mac (4-134)

show map access-list mac

This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.)

Syntax

show map access-list mac [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show map access-list mac

Access-list to COS of Eth 1/5

Access-list jerry cos 0

Console#

Related Commands

map access-list mac (4-133)

4-134

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

ACL Information

Table 4-38 ACL Information

Command

show access-list

Function

Show all ACLs and associated rules

Mode

PE show access-group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE

Page

4-135

4-136

show access-list

This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the user-defined masks.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.

Example

Console#show access-list

IP standard access-list david:

permit host 10.1.1.21

permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

IP extended access-list bob:

permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80

permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2

MAC access-list jerry:

permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800

IP extended access-list A6:

permit 10.7.1.0 255.255.255.0 any

permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80

permit TCP 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2

Console#

4-135

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show access-group

This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Executive

Example

Console#show access-group

Interface ethernet 1/25

IP standard access-list david

MAC access-list jerry

Console#

SNMP Commands

Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple

Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.

Table 4-39 SNMP Commands

Command

snmp-server community snmp-server contact snmp-server location

Function

Sets up the community access string to permit access to SNMP commands

Sets the system contact string

Sets the system location string

Mode Page

GC snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation snmp-server enable traps show snmp

Enables the device to send SNMP traps

(i.e., SNMP notifications)

Displays the status of SNMP communications NE,

4-136

SNMP C

OMMANDS

snmp-server community

This command defines the community access string for the Simple

Network Management Protocol. Use the no form to remove the specified community string.

Syntax

snmp-server community string [ro|rw]

no snmp-server community string

• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive; Maximum number of strings: 5)

• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Default Setting

• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The first snmp-server community command you enter enables

SNMP. The no snmp-server community command disables SNMP.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw

Console(config)#

4-137

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

snmp-server contact

This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the system contact information.

Syntax

snmp-server contact string

no snmp-server contact

string - String that describes the system contact information.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server contact Joe

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server location (4-138)

snmp-server location

This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the location string.

Syntax

snmp-server location text

no snmp-server location

text - String that describes the system location.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

4-138

SNMP C

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server location Room 23

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server contact (4-138)

snmp-server host

This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management

Protocol notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.

Syntax

snmp-server host host-addr community-string [version {1 | 2c}]

no snmp-server host host-addr

• host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).

(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)

• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. Although you can set this string using the

snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length:

32 characters)

• version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps. (Range: 1, 2c; Default: 1)

Default Setting

Host Address: None

SNMP Version: 1

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-139

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.

• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the

snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable

traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive notifications, at least one snmp-server

enable traps command and the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.

• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server

enable traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.

• The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server enable traps (4-141)

4-140

SNMP C

OMMANDS

snmp-server enable traps

This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management

Protocol traps (SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.

Syntax

[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]

• authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure traps.

• link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down traps.

Default Setting

Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.

• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications.

In order to send notifications, you must configure at least one

snmp-server host command.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server host (4-139)

4-141

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show snmp

This command checks the status of SNMP communications.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command provides information on the community access strings, counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the

snmp-server enable traps command.

Example

Console#show snmp

SNMP traps:

Authentication: enabled

Link-up-down: enabled

SNMP communities:

1. alpha, and the privilege is read-write

2. private, and the privilege is read-write

3. public, and the privilege is read-only

0 SNMP packets input

0 Bad SNMP version errors

0 Unknown community name

0 Illegal operation for community name supplied

0 Encoding errors

0 Number of requested variables

0 Number of altered variables

0 Get-request PDUs

0 Get-next PDUs

0 Set-request PDUs

0 SNMP packets output

0 Too big errors

0 No such name errors

0 Bad values errors

0 General errors

0 Response PDUs

0 Trap PDUs

SNMP logging: enabled

Logging to 10.1.19.23 batman version 1

Console#

4-142

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Interface Commands

These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.

Table 4-40 Interface Commands

Command

interface

Function

Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration mode

Mode Page

GC description speed-duplex

Adds a description to an interface configuration IC

Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled

IC negotiation capabilities flowcontrol

Enables autonegotiation of a given interface

Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in autonegotiation

Enables flow control on a given interface

switchport broadcast packet-rate

Configures the broadcast storm control threshold

IC clear counters show interfaces status show interfaces counters

Clears statistics on an interface

Displays status for the specified interface

NE,

Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE,

PE show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

NE,

4-143

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

interface

This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode. Use the no form to remove a trunk.

Syntax

interface interface

no interface port-channel channel-id

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

To specify port 24, enter the following command:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24

Console(config-if)#

description

This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the description.

Syntax

description string

no description

string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

4-144

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

The following example adds a description to port 24.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24

Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3

Console(config-if)#

speed-duplex

This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}

no speed-duplex

• 1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

• 10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

Default Setting

• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.

• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is

100half for 100BASE-TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a

speed-duplex command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on the selected interface.

4-145

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.

To set the speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface.

Example

The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-146)

capabilities (4-147)

negotiation

This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to disable autonegotiation.

Syntax

[no] negotiation

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.

• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.

4-146

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Example

The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

capabilities (4-147)

speed-duplex (4-145)

capabilities

This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.

Syntax

[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half |

flowcontrol | symmetric}

• 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

• 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

• flowcontrol - Supports flow control

• symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause

frames.)

Default Setting

• 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full

• SFP: 1000full

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-147

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the

capabilites command. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and

flowcontrol commands.

Example

The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half,

100full and flow control.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-146)

speed-duplex (4-145)

flowcontrol (4-148)

flowcontrol

This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.

4-148

Syntax

[no] flowcontrol

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and

IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex operation.

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no

flowcontrol command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on the selected interface.

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.

To enable flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the capabilities list for any port

• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.

Example

The following example enables flow control on port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (4-146)

capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-147)

shutdown

This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the

no form.

Syntax

[no] shutdown

Default Setting

All interfaces are enabled.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-149

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior

(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.

Example

The following example disables port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#shutdown

Console(config-if)#

switchport broadcast packet-rate

This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control.

Syntax

switchport broadcast octet-rate rate

no switchport broadcast

rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., octets per second.

(Range: 64-95232000)

Default Setting

Enabled for all ports

Packet-rate limit: 32000 octets per second

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above that threshold are dropped.

• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch.

4-150

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Example

The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#

clear counters

This command clears statistics on an interface.

Syntax

clear counters interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session. However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.

Example

The following example clears statistics on port 5.

Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5

Console#

4-151

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show interfaces status

This command displays the status for an interface.

Syntax

show interfaces status [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)

Default Setting

Shows the status for all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

For a description of the items displayed by this command, see

“Displaying Connection Status” on page 3-87.

4-152

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/5

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D3-26-05

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second

Flow control: Disabled

Lacp: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Current status:

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Console#show interfaces status vlan 1

Information of VLAN 1

MAC address: 00-00-AB-CD-00-00

Console#

show interfaces counters

This command displays interface statistics.

Syntax

show interfaces counters [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

Shows the counters for all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-153

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

For a description of the items displayed by this command, see

“Showing Port Statistics” on page 3-114.

Example

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/7

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550

Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064

Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338

Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 4, Packet size 256 to 511 octets:0

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0

Console#

4-154

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

show interfaces switchport

This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces.

Syntax

show interfaces switchport [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

Shows all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

Example

This example shows the configuration setting for port 24.

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/24

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 octets/second

LACP status: Enabled

Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0

GVRP status: Disabled

Allowed Vlan: 1(u),

Forbidden Vlan:

Private-VLAN mode: NONE

Private-VLAN host-association: NONE

Private-VLAN mapping: NONE

Console#

4-155

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Table 4-41 Interfaces Switchport Statistics

Field

Lacp status

Description

Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled;

if enabled it also shows the threshold level (page 4-150).

Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been

enabled or disabled (page 4-165).

Ingress/Egress rate limit

Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit.

(page 4-160).

VLAN membership mode

Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page

4-201).

Ingress rule

Acceptable frame type

Native VLAN

Priority for untagged traffic

Gvrp status

Allowed Vlan

Forbidden Vlan

Private VLAN mode

Private VLAN host-association

Private VLAN mapping

Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-203).

Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged

frames only (page 4-202).

Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-204).

Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page

4-222).

Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or

disabled (page 4-219).

Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)”

indicates untagged and “(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-205).

Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via

GVRP (page 4-206).

Shows the private VLAN mode as host, promiscuous, or

none (4-213).

Shows the secondary (or community) VLAN with which this

port is associated (4-214).

Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port

(4-215).

4-156

IRROR

ORT

OMMANDS

Mirror Port Commands

This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.

Command

port monitor show port monitor

Table 4-42 Mirror Port Commands

Function

Configures a mirror session

Mode

Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE

Page

4-157

4-158

port monitor

This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror session.

Syntax

port monitor interface [rx | tx]

no port monitor interface

• interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• rx - Mirror received packets.

• tx - Mirror transmitted packets.

Default Setting

No mirror session is defined.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)

Command Usage

• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.

• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.

4-157

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.

• You can only create a single mirror session.

Example

The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6 to 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx

Console(config-if)#

show port monitor

This command displays mirror information.

Syntax

show port monitor [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

Default Setting

Shows all sessions.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port, and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX).

4-158

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

Example

The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show port monitor

Port Mirroring

-------------------------------------

Destination port(listen port):Eth1/11

Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/ 6

Mode :RX

Console#

Rate Limit Commands

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.

Note: The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the “rate limit”

(page 4-160) to set the actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity

is a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

Table 4-43 Rate Limit Commands

Command

rate-limit

Function

Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port rate-limit granularity

Sets the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity show rate-limit Shows the rate limit granularity

Mode Page

4-160

4-161

4-162

4-159

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

rate-limit

Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface. Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level. Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled.

Syntax

rate-limit {input | output} level [rate]

no rate-limit {input | output}

• input – Input rate

• output – Output rate

• rate – Maximum value. (Range: 1-30)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 20

Console(config-if)#

4-160

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

rate-limit granularity

Use this command to define the rate limit granularity for the Fast Ethernet ports, and the Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the default setting.

Syntax

rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity [granularity]

no rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity

• fastethernet – Fast Ethernet granularity

• gigabitethernet – Gigabit Ethernet granularity

• granularity – Sets rate limit granularity for the system. For Fast

Ethernet, choose 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps. For Gigabit

Ethernet, only one granularity option is supported, 33.3 Mbps

Default Setting

Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps

Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps

Command Mode

Global Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity

Example

The following sets Fast Ethernet granularity to 1 Mbps, and Gigabit

Ethernet granularity to 33.3 Mbps.

Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 1000

Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300

Console(config)#

4-161

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show rate-limit

Use this command to display the rate limit granularity.

Default Setting

Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps

Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 512 Kbps, 1

Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps.

• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.

Example

Console#show rate-limit

Fast ethernet granularity: 1000

Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300

Console#

4-162

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Link Aggregation Commands

Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have to comply with the

Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to four trunks. For example, a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.

Table 4-44 Link Aggregation Commands

Command Function

Manual Configuration Commands

interface port-channel

Configures a trunk and enters interface configuration mode for the trunk channel-group Adds a port to a trunk

Dynamic Configuration Command

lacp Configures LACP for the current interface lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP system priority lacp admin-key Configures a port's administration key lacp admin-key Configures an port channel’s administration key lacp port-priority Configures a port's LACP port priority

Trunk Status Display Command

show interfaces status port-channel

Shows trunk information show lacp Shows LACP information

Mode

IC (Ethernet)

IC (Port Channel) 4-170

IC (Ethernet)

NE, PE

Page

4-163

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Guidelines for Creating Trunks

General Guidelines –

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• A trunk can have up to eight ports.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port-channel.

Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:

• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.

• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).

• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key -

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.

• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.

• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.

4-164

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

channel-group

This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.

Syntax

channel-group channel-id

no channel-group

channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

The current port will be added to this trunk.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the

Cisco EtherChannel standard.

• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.

• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.

Example

The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#

lacp

This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol

(LACP) for the current interface. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] lacp

Default Setting

Disabled

4-165

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port-channel ID.

• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically.

• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have

LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.

4-166

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Example

The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11-13. Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show

interfaces status port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#exit

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-00-e8-00-00-0b

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Flow control status: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: LACP

Link status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/11, Eth1/12, Eth1/13,

Console#

4-167

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

lacp system-priority

This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority

no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group

(LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.

• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems.

• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#

4-168

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface)

This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key

[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group (LAG).

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the

LACP port channel key matches (if configured).

• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key -

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#

4-169

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

lacp admin-key (Port Channel)

This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key

[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key

key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the

LACP port channel key matches (if configured).

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer used, the port channel admin key is reset to 0.

Example

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 3

Console(config-if)#

4-170

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

lacp port-priority

This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority

no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link.

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.

• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128

4-171

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show lacp

This command displays LACP information.

Syntax

show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sysid}

• port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group.

(Range: 1-4)

• counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.

• internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.

• neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.

• sysid - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups.

Default Setting

Port Channel: all

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-172

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show lacp 1 counters

Port channel : 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Sent : 21

LACPDUs Received : 21

Marker Sent : 0

Marker Received : 0

LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0

LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0

Table 4-45 show lacp counters - display description

Field

LACPDUs Sent

Description

Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.

Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.

LACPDUs

Received

Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.

Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.

LACPDUs

Unknown Pkts

LACPDUs Illegal

Pkts

Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow

Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown

PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC

Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type.

Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet

Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

4-173

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel : 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key : 4

Admin Key : 0

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal : 30 sec

LACP System Priority : 32768

LACP Port Priority : 32768

Admin Key : 4

Oper Key : 4

Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description

Field

Oper Key

Admin Key

LACPDUs

Internal

LACP System

Priority

LACP Port

Priority

Description

Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.

Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.

Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.

LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.

LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.

4-174

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Table 4-46 show lacp internal - display description (Continued)

Field

Admin State,

Oper State

Description

Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:

• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;

• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information, administratively configured for the partner.

• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be

IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link

Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link

Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.

• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.

• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.

• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.

(0: Passive; 1: Active)

4-175

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

4-176

Console#show lacp 1 neighbors

Port channel 1 neighbors

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00

Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-01

Partner Admin Port Number : 1

Partner Oper Port Number : 1

Port Admin Priority : 32768

Port Oper Priority : 32768

Admin Key : 0

Oper Key : 4

Admin State : defaulted, distributing, collecting, synchronization, long timeout,

Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Table 4-47 show lacp neighbors - display description

Field

Partner Admin

System ID

Partner Oper

System ID

Partner Admin

Port Number

Partner Oper

Port Number

Description

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.

Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol partner.

Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.

Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.

Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Oper Key

Admin State

Oper State

Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

Operational values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

Console#show lacp sysid

Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address

-------------------------------------------------------------------

1 32768 00-30-F1-D3-26-00

2 32768 00-30-F1-D3-26-00

3 32768 00-30-F1-D3-26-00

4 32768 00-30-F1-D3-26-00

Console#

Table 4-48 show lacp sysid - display description

Field

Channel group

Description

A link aggregation group configured on this switch.

LACP system priority for this channel group.

System Priority

System MAC

Address *

System MAC address.

* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.

Address Table Commands

These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.

Command

mac-address-table static clear mac-address-table dynamic show mac-address-table mac-address-table aging-time show mac-address-table aging-time

Table 4-49 Address Table Commands

Function Mode Page

Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC

4-178

Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database

Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database

Sets the aging time of the address table

Shows the aging time for the address table PE

4-179

4-180

4-181

4-177

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

mac-address-table static

This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no form to remove an address.

Syntax

mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface

vlan vlan-id [action]

no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id

• mac-address - MAC address.

• interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)

• action -

- delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.

- permanent - Assignment is permanent.

Default Setting

No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:

• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down.

• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.

4-178

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

Console(config)#

clear mac-address-table dynamic

This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic

Console#

show mac-address-table

This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.

Syntax

show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface

interface] [vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]

• mac-address - MAC address.

• mask - Bits to match in the address.

• interface

- ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)

• sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.

4-179

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:

- Learned - Dynamic address entries

- Permanent - Static entry

- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset

• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified

MAC address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0” means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of 00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”

• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.

Example

Console#show mac-address-table

Interface Mac Address Vlan Type

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/1 00-00-E8-49-5E-DC 1 Delete-on-reset

Trunk 2 00-E0-29-8F-AA-1B 1 Learned

Console#

mac-address-table aging-time

This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the

no form to restore the default aging time.

Syntax

mac-address-table aging-time seconds

no mac-address-table aging-time

seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-30000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)

4-180

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

Default Setting

300 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100

Console(config)#

show mac-address-table aging-time

This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac-address-table aging-time

Aging time: 100 sec.

Console#

4-181

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Spanning Tree Commands

This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree

Algorithm (STA) globally for the switch, and commands that configure

STA for the selected interface.

Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands

Command

spanning-tree

Function

Enables the spanning tree protocol spanning-tree mode Configures STP or RSTP spanning-tree forward-time spanning-tree hello-time

Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time

Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time

GC spanning-tree max-age spanning-tree priority

Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age

Configures the spanning tree bridge priority

GC spanning-tree path-cost method spanning-tree transmission-limit

Configures the path cost method for

RSTP

Configures the transmission limit for

RSTP

Disables spanning tree for an interface IC spanning-tree spanning-disabled spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface

IC spanning-tree port-priority spanning-tree edge-port spanning-tree portfast spanning-tree link-type

Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface

Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC

Sets an interface to fast forwarding

Configures the link type for RSTP

Mode

Page

4-182

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Table 4-50 Spanning Tree Commands

Command

spanning-tree protocol-migration

Function

show spanning-tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge) or a selected interface

Mode

Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format PE

Page

4-195

spanning-tree

This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree

Default Setting

Spanning tree is enabled.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Example

This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#

4-183

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

spanning-tree mode

This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

4-184

Syntax

spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp}

no spanning-tree mode

• stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

• rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

Default Setting

rstp

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D

BPDUs.

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

Example

The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:

Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp

Console(config)#

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree forward-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree forward-time seconds

no spanning-tree forward-time

seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) +1].

Default Setting

15 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).

This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#

spanning-tree hello-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree hello-time time

no spanning-tree hello-time

time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).

The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].

4-185

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

2 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#

spanning-tree max-age

This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree max-age seconds

no spanning-tree max-age

seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].

The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].

Default Setting

20 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message)

4-186

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40

Console(config)#

spanning-tree priority

This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree priority priority

no spanning-tree priority

priority - Priority of the bridge.

(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096,

8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,

40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40960

Console(config)#

4-187

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

spanning-tree pathcost method

This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning

Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}

no spanning-tree pathcost method

• long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 0-200,000,000.

• short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 0-65535.

Default Setting

Long method

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.

Note that path cost (page 4-190) takes precedence over port priority

(page 4-191).

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#

spanning-tree transmission-limit

This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.

4-188

Syntax

spanning-tree transmission-limit count

no spanning-tree transmission-limit

count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)

Default Setting

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Console(config)#

spanning-tree spanning-disabled

This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.

Example

This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled

Console(config-if)#

4-189

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

spanning-tree cost

This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree cost cost

no spanning-tree cost

cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 1-200,000,000))

The recommended range is:

• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000

• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000

• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000

Default Setting

• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000

• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000

• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.

• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.

• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-188) is set to short,

the maximum value for path cost is 65,535.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 5000

Console(config-if)#

4-190

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree port-priority

This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the

no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree port-priority priority

no spanning-tree port-priority

priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)

Default Setting

128

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the

Spanning Tree Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree.

• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 128

Related Commands

spanning-tree cost (4-190)

spanning-tree edge-port

This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree edge-port

4-191

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge

Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree portfast (4-192)

spanning-tree portfast

This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast forwarding.

Syntax

[no] spanning-tree portfast

Default Setting

Disabled

4-192

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and

Learning states, and proceed straight to Forwarding.

• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end-node device.)

• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may be removed for future software versions.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree portfast

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree edge-port (4-191)

spanning-tree link-type

This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree. Use the

no form to restore the default.

Syntax

spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}

no spanning-tree link-type

• auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.

• point-to-point - Point-to-point link.

• shared - Shared medium.

4-193

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

auto

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.

• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.

• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

spanning-tree protocol-migration

This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface.

Syntax

spanning-tree protocol-migration interface

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-194

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Command Usage

If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or STP-compatible).

Example

Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration ethernet 1/5

Console#

show spanning-tree

This command shows the configuration for the spanning tree.

Syntax

show spanning-tree [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - This is device 1.

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch and for every interface in the tree.

• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for a specific interface.

4-195

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree

information,” see “Configuring Global Settings” on page 3 -129. For

a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces, see

“Displaying Interface Settings” on page 3 -133.

Example

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode: RSTP

Spanning tree enabled/disabled: enabled

Priority: 40960

Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2

Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Root Hello Time (sec.): 2

Root Max Age (sec.): 20

Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Designated Root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Current root port: 1

Current root cost: 50000

Number of topology changes: 5

Last topology changes time (sec.):226

Transmission limit: 3

Path Cost Method: long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

Role: root

State: forwarding

Path cost: 100000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 200000

Designated port: 128.24

Designated root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Designated bridge: 32768.0.0030F1552000

Fast forwarding: enabled

Forward transitions: 1

Admin edge port: enabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enabled

Console#

4-196

VLAN C

OMMANDS

VLAN Commands

A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic

VLAN registration for the selected interface.

Table 4-51 VLANs

Command Groups Function

Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state

Configuring VLAN

Interfaces

Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP

Displaying VLAN

Information

Configuring Private

VLANs

Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses

Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports

Page

Editing VLAN Groups

Table 4-52 Editing VLAN Groups

Command Function

vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state

Mode Page

4-197

4-198

vlan database

This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take effect immediately.

Default Setting

None

4-197

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete

VLANs. After finishing configuration changes, you can display the

VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command.

• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by entering the show

running-config command.

Example

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

show vlan (4-207)

vlan

This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN.

4-198

Syntax

vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active |

suspend}]

no vlan vlan-id [name | state]

• vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)

• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.

- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

• media ethernet - Ethernet media type.

• state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.

- active - VLAN is operational.

- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Default Setting

By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.

Command Mode

VLAN Database Configuration

Command Usage

• no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.

• no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.

• no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state

(i.e., active).

• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.

Example

The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name

RD5. The VLAN is activated by default.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet

Console(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

show vlan (4-207)

4-199

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Configuring VLAN Interfaces

Table 4-53 Configuring VLAN Interfaces

Command

interface vlan switchport mode switchport acceptable-frame-types switchport ingress-filtering

Function

Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN

Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface

Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface

Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC switchport native vlan Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface switchport forbidden vlan switchport priority default

Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface

Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames

Mode Page

interface vlan

This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.

Syntax

interface vlan vlan-id

vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-200

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

shutdown (4-149)

switchport mode

This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport mode {trunk | hybrid | private-vlan}

no switchport mode

• trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.

• hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames.

• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “switchport

mode private-vlan” on page 4-213.

Default Setting

All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

4-201

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the switchport mode to hybrid:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

switchport acceptable-frame-types (4-202)

switchport acceptable-frame-types

This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the

no form to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}

no switchport acceptable-frame-types

• all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.

• tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.

Default Setting

All frame types

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.

Example

The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

Console(config-if)#

4-202

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Related Commands

switchport mode (4-201)

switchport ingress-filtering

This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[no] switchport ingress-filtering

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent

BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#

4-203

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

switchport native vlan

This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport native vlan vlan-id

no switchport native vlan

vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port.

(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

VLAN 1

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to

hybrid, the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.

Example

The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

Console(config-if)#

4-204

VLAN C

OMMANDS

switchport allowed vlan

This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |

remove vlan-list}

no switchport allowed vlan

• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.

• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.

• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4094).

Default Setting

• All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default

• The default frame type is untagged.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged.

• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.

• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress.

• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface.

4-205

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface.

Example

The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged

Console(config-if)#

switchport forbidden vlan

This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs.

Syntax

switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}

no switchport forbidden vlan

• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.

• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.

• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4094).

Default Setting

No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP.

• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.

4-206

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to

VLAN 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3

Console(config-if)#

Displaying VLAN Information

Command

show vlan show interfaces status vlan show interfaces switchport

Table 4-54 Show VLAN Commands

Function

Shows VLAN information

Displays status for the specified VLAN interface

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

Mode Page

NE,

4-207

4-152

NE,

4-155

show vlan

This command shows VLAN information.

Syntax

show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name | private-vlan private-vlan-type]

• id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.

- vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.

- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

• private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “show vlan

private-vlan” on page 4-216

- private-vlan-type - Indicates the private vlan type.

(Options: Community, Isolated, Primary)

Default Setting

Shows all VLANs.

4-207

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:

Console#show vlan id 1

Vlan ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)

Eth1/26(S)

Console#

Configuring Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private

VLANs: primary/secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated

VLANs, on the other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated (or host) ports.

In all cases, the promiscuous ports are designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.

4-208

VLAN C

OMMANDS

This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs.

Table 4-55 Private VLAN Commands

Command Function

Edit Private VLAN Groups

private-vlan Adds or deletes primary, community, or isolated VLANs private-vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a primary VLAN

Configure Private VLAN Interfaces

switchport mode private-vlan switchport private-vlan host-association

Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode

Associates an interface with a secondary

VLAN

Mode Page

IC switchport private-vlan isolated switchport private-vlan mapping

Associates an interface with an isolated

VLAN

Display Private VLAN Information

show vlan private-vlan Shows private VLAN information

Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC

NE,

To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:

Use the private-vlan command to designate one or more community

VLANs and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups.

2. Use the private-vlan association command to map the community

VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.

3. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure ports as promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN) or host (i.e., community port).

4. Use the switchport private-vlan host-association command to assign a port to a secondary VLAN.

4-209

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

5. Use the switchport private-vlan mapping command to assign a port to a primary VLAN.

6. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.

To configure isolated VLANs, follow these steps:

Use the private-vlan command to designate an isolated VLAN that will contain a single promiscuous port and one or more isolated ports.

2. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure one port as promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the isolated

VLAN) one or more ports as host (i.e., isolated port).

3. Use the switchport private-vlan isolated command to assign a port to an isolated VLAN.

4. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.

private-vlan

Use this command to create a primary, community, or isolated private

VLAN. Use the no form to remove the specified private VLAN.

Syntax

private-vlan vlan-id {community | primary | isolated}

no private-vlan vlan-id

• vlan-id - ID of private VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).

• community - A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN.

• primary - A VLAN which can contain one or more community

VLANs, and serves to channel traffic between community

VLANs and other locations.

• isolated – Specifies an isolated VLAN. Ports assigned to an isolated VLAN can only communicate with the promiscuous port within their own VLAN.

4-210

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration

Command Usage

• Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community or isolated VLAN, and channel traffic passing outside the community through promiscuous ports. When using community

VLANs, they must be mapped to an associated “primary” VLAN that contains promiscuous ports. When using an isolated VLAN, it must be configured to contain a single promiscuous port.

• Port membership for private VLANs is static. Once a port has been assigned to a private VLAN, it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP.

• Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode. (See “switchport

mode” on page 4-201.)

Example

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 primary

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 3 community

Console(config)#

4-211

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

private vlan association

Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN. Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN.

Syntax

private-vlan primary-vlan-id association {secondary-vlan-id |

add secondary-vlan-id | remove secondary-vlan-id}

no private-vlan primary-vlan-id association

• primary-vlan-id - ID of primary VLAN.

(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).

• secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e, community) VLAN.

(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration

Command Usage

Secondary VLANs provide security for group members. The associated primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network resources within the primary VLAN (e.g., servers configured with promiscuous ports) and to resources outside of the primary

VLAN (via promiscuous ports).

Example

Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 association 3

Console(config)#

4-212

VLAN C

OMMANDS

switchport mode private-vlan

Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface. Use the

no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous}

no switchport mode private-vlan

• host – This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community or isolated VLAN.

• promiscuous – This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous ports in the same primary VLAN, as well as with all the ports in the associated secondary VLANs.

Default Setting

Normal VLAN

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN, use the switchport

private-vlan mapping command. To assign a host port to a community VLAN, use the private-vlan host association command.

• To assign a promiscuous port or host port to an isolated VLAN, use the switchport private-vlan isolated command.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host

Console(config-if)#

4-213

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

switchport private-vlan host-association

Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN. Use the no form to remove this association.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan host-association secondary-vlan-id

no switchport private-vlan host-association

secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e., community) VLAN.

(Range: 1-4094).

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

All ports assigned to a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN can pass traffic between group members, but must communicate with resources outside of the group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary

VLAN.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3

Console(config-if)#

switchport private-vlan isolated

Use this command to assign an interface to an isolated VLAN. Use the no form to remove this assignment.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan isolated isolated-vlan-id

no switchport private-vlan isolated

isolated-vlan-id - ID of isolated VLAN. (Range: 1-4094).

4-214

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

Host ports assigned to a isolated VLAN cannot pass traffic between group members, and must communicate with resources outside of the group via a promiscuous port.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan isolated 3

Console(config-if)#

switchport private-vlan mapping

Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN. Use the no form to remove this mapping.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id

no switchport private-vlan mapping

primary-vlan-id – ID of primary VLAN.

(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN, and with the group members within any associated secondary VLANs.

4-215

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 2

Console(config-if)#

show vlan private-vlan

Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch.

Syntax

show vlan private-vlan [community | isolated | primary]

• community – Displays all community VLANs, along with their associated primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.

• isolated – Displays an isolated VLAN, along with the assigned promiscuous interface and host interfaces. The Primary and

Secondary fields both display the isolated VLAN ID.

• primary – Displays all primary VLANs, along with any assigned promiscuous interfaces.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Executive

Example

Console#show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------

5 primary Eth1/ 3

5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5

0 8 isolated

Console#

4-216

GVRP

AND

RIDGE

XTENSION

OMMANDS

GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension

MIB.

Table 4-56 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

Command

bridge-ext gvrp show bridge-ext

Function

Enables GVRP globally for the switch

Shows the global bridge extension configuration switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function

Mode Page

NE,

bridge-ext gvrp

This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] bridge-ext gvrp

Default Setting

Disabled

4-217

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.

Example

Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp

Console(config)#

show bridge-ext

This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 3 -145 and

“Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3 -15 for a

description of the displayed items.

Example

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support vlan numbers: 255

Max support vlan ID: 4094

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

Global GVRP status: Enabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

4-218

GVRP

AND

RIDGE

XTENSION

OMMANDS

switchport gvrp

This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] switchport gvrp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6

Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp

Console(config-if)#

show gvrp configuration

This command shows if GVRP is enabled.

Syntax

show gvrp configuration [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/6

Eth 1/ 6:

GVRP configuration: Enabled

Console#

4-219

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

garp timer

This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no form to restore the timers’ default values.

Syntax

garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value

no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}

• {join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.

• timer_value - Value of timer.

Ranges:

- join: 20-1000 centiseconds

- leave: 60-3000 centiseconds

- leavall: 500-18000 centiseconds

Default Setting

• join: 20 centiseconds

• leave: 60 centiseconds

• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with

GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.

• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.

• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:

- leave >= (2 x join)

- leaveall > leave

Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.

4-220

GVRP

AND

RIDGE

XTENSION

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show garp timer (4-221)

show garp timer

This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.

Syntax

show garp timer [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

Shows all GARP timers.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1

Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:

Join timer: 100 centiseconds

Leave timer: 60 centiseconds

Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds

Console#

Related Commands

garp timer (4-220)

4-221

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Priority Commands

The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Table 4-57 Priority Commands

Command Groups Function

Priority (Layer 2) Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights, and maps class of service tags to hardware queues

Priority (Layer 3 and 4) Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP tags to class of service values

Page

4-222

4-229

Priority Commands (Layer 2)

Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2)

Command

queue mode switchport priority default

Function

Sets the queue mode to strict priority or

Weighted Round-Robin (WRR)

Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames queue bandwidth Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues queue cos map Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues show queue mode Shows the current queue mode show queue bandwidth

Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues

Mode Page

4-222

RIORITY

OMMANDS

Table 4-58 Priority Commands (Layer 2) (Continued)

Command

show queue cos-map show interfaces switchport

Function

Shows the class-of-service map

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

Mode Page

4-228

4-155

queue mode

This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted

Round-Robin (WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the

no form to restore the default value.

Syntax

queue mode {strict | wrr}

no queue mode

• strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

• wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.

Default Setting

Weighted Round Robin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

(WRR) queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.

4-223

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:

Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#

switchport priority default

This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax

switchport priority default default-priority-id

no switchport priority default

default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.

The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.

Default Setting

The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with

the show queue bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not

have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress ports is zero.

4-224

RIORITY

OMMANDS

Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.)

Example

The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

queue bandwidth

This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.

Syntax

queue bandwidth weight1...weight3

no queue bandwidth

weight1...weight3 - The ratio of weights for queues 0-3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler. However, note that Queue 0 is fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)

Default Setting

Weights 1, 2, 4, 6 are assigned to queues 0-3 respectively.

Queue 0 is non-configurable.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights.

Example

This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 1 - 3:

Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12

Console(config)#

4-225

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Related Commands

show queue bandwidth (4-227)

queue cos-map

This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues

(i.e., hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values.

Syntax

queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]

no queue cos-map

• queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.

Ranges are 0 to 3, where 3 is the highest priority queue.

• cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7, where 7 is the highest priority.

Default Setting

This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues, with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.

Table 4-59 Default CoS Priority Levels

Queue

0 1 2 3

Priority

1, 2 0, 3 4, 5 6, 7

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.

• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.

4-226

RIORITY

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to map CoS values 0, 1 and 2 to egress queue 0, value 3 to egress queue 1, values 4 and 5 to egress queue 2, and values 6 and 7 to egress queue 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 1 2

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 3

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 4 5

Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 3 6 7

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3

Console#

Related Commands

show queue cos-map (4-228)

show queue mode

This command shows the current queue mode.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show queue mode

Queue mode: wrr

Console#

show queue bandwidth

This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for the four priority queues.

Default Setting

None

4-227

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show queue bandwidth

Queue ID Weight

-------- ------

0 1

1 2

2 4

3 6

Console#

show queue cos-map

This command shows the class of service priority map.

Syntax

show queue cos-map [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1

Information of Eth 1/1

CoS Value : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3

Console#

4-228

RIORITY

OMMANDS

Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)

Table 4-60 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)

Command

map ip port

Function Mode Page

Enables TCP class of service mapping GC

4-230

map ip port map ip precedence

Maps TCP socket to a class of service IC

Enables IP precedence class of service mapping

4-230

4-232

map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of service map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping

4-233

4-126

map ip dscp map access-list ip

Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC

Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets matching an

ACL rule

IC map access-list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets matching an

ACL rule

4-133

show map ip port show map ip precedence

Shows the IP port map

Shows the IP precedence map show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map show map access-list ip show map access-list mac

Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface

4-229

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

map ip port (Global Configuration)

This command enables IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for

TCP/UDP sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.

Syntax

[no] map ip port

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

Example

The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip port

Console(config)#

map ip port (Interface Configuration)

This command set IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the

no form to remove a specific setting.

Syntax

map ip port port number cos cos-value

no map ip port port-number

• port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number. (Range: 1-65535)

• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

None

4-230

RIORITY

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces.

Example

The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0

Console(config-if)#

map ip precedence (Global Configuration)

This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service).

Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping.

Syntax

[no] map ip precedence

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type.

Example

The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#

4-231

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)

This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.

Syntax

map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value

no map ip precedence

• precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)

• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

Default Setting

The list below shows the default priority mapping.

Table 4-61 Mapping IP Precedence Values

IP Precedence Value 0

CoS Value

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.

• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.

Example

The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#

4-232

RIORITY

OMMANDS

map ip dscp (Global Configuration)

This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services

Code Point mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.

Syntax

[no] map ip dscp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type.

Example

The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:

Console(config)#map ip dscp

Console(config)#

map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)

This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code

Point priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.

Syntax

map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value

no map ip dscp

• dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)

• cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)

4-233

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.

Table 4-62 IP DSCP to CoS Values

IP DSCP Value

10, 12, 14, 16

18, 20, 22, 24 3

26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 4

38, 40, 42

46, 56 7

CoS Value

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently mapped to the four hardware priority queues.

• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.

Example

The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#

4-234

RIORITY

OMMANDS

show map ip port

Use this command to show the IP port priority map.

Syntax

show map ip port [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:

Console#show map ip port

TCP port mapping status: enabled

Port Port no. COS

--------- -------- ---

Eth 1/ 5 80 0

Console#

Related Commands

map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-230) map ip port (Interface Configuration) (4-230)

4-235

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

show map ip precedence

This command shows the IP precedence priority map.

Syntax

show map ip precedence [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5

Precedence mapping status: enabled

Port Precedence COS

--------- ---------- ---

Eth 1/ 5 0 0

Eth 1/ 5 1 1

Eth 1/ 5 2 2

Eth 1/ 5 3 3

Eth 1/ 5 4 4

Eth 1/ 5 5 5

Eth 1/ 5 6 6

Eth 1/ 5 7 7

Console#

Related Commands

map ip port (Global Configuration) (4-230)

map ip precedence (Interface Configuration) (4-232)

4-236

show map ip dscp

This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.

Syntax

show map ip dscp [interface]

interface

• ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1

DSCP mapping status: enabled

Port DSCP COS

--------- ---- ---

Eth 1/ 1 0 0

Eth 1/ 1 1 0

Eth 1/ 1 2 0

Eth 1/ 1 3 0

Eth 1/ 1 61 0

Eth 1/ 1 62 0

Eth 1/ 1 63 0

Console#

Related Commands

map ip dscp (Global Configuration) (4-233) map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) (4-233)

RIORITY

OMMANDS

4-237

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Multicast Filtering Commands

This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Table 4-63 Multicast Filtering Commands

Command Groups Function

IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment, sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and query settings, and displays the multicast service and group members

IGMP Query

Static Multicast

Routing

Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2

Configures static multicast router ports

Page

4-238

4-242

4-247

IGMP Snooping Commands

Table 4-64 IGMP Snooping Commands

Command

ip igmp snooping ip igmp snooping vlan static ip igmp snooping version show ip igmp snooping show mac-address-table multicast

Function

Enables IGMP snooping

Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group

Configures the IGMP version for snooping

Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration

Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list

Mode Page

4-239

4-240

4-241

4-238

ULTICAST

ILTERING

OMMANDS

ip igmp snooping

This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following example enables IGMP snooping.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping vlan static

This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)

• ip-address - IP address for multicast group

• interface

- ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

None

4-239

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12

ethernet 1/5

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping version

This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}

no ip igmp snooping version

• 1 - IGMP Version 1

• 2 - IGMP Version 2

Default Setting

IGMP Version 2

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1.

• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp

query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.

Example

The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1

Console(config)#

4-240

ULTICAST

ILTERING

OMMANDS

show ip igmp snooping

This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on

page 3-181 for a description of the displayed items.

Example

The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:

Console#show ip igmp snooping

Service status: Enabled

Querier status: Enabled

Query count: 2

Query interval: 125 sec

Query max response time: 10 sec

Router port expire time: 300 sec

IGMP snooping version: Version 2

Console#

show mac-address-table multicast

This command shows known multicast addresses.

Syntax

show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id]

[user | igmp-snooping]

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)

• user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.

• igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.

Default Setting

None

4-241

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected options.

Example

The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1:

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/11 IGMP

Console#

IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)

Table 4-65 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)

Command

ip igmp snooping query-count

Function

ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping

Configures the query count

Configures the query interval ip igmp snooping query-interval ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time

Configures the report delay ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time

Configures the query timeout

Mode Page

4-242

ULTICAST

ILTERING

OMMANDS

ip igmp snooping querier

This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping querier

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.

Example

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier

Console(config)#

ip igmp snooping query-count

This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-count count

no ip igmp snooping query-count

count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group. (Range: 2-10)

Default Setting

2 times

Command Mode

Global Configuration

4-243

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip

igmp snooping query-max- response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.

Example

The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-245)

ip igmp snooping query-interval

This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds

no ip igmp snooping query-interval

seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query messages. (Range: 60-125)

Default Setting

125 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100

Console(config)#

4-244

ULTICAST

ILTERING

OMMANDS

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time

This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds

no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time

seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-25)

Default Setting

10 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.

• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.

Example

The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to

20 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping version (4-240)

ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-245)

4-245

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time

This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds

no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time

seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving query packets) to have expired.

(Range: 300-500)

Default Setting

300 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.

Example

The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip igmp snooping version (4-240)

4-246

ULTICAST

ILTERING

OMMANDS

Static Multicast Routing Commands

Table 4-66 Static Multicast Routing Commands

Command

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Function

Adds a multicast router port

Shows multicast router ports

Mode

Page

4-247

4-248

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to remove the configuration.

Syntax

[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)

• interface

- ethernet unit/port

- unit - Stack unit. (This is unit 1)

- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)

- port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)

Default Setting

No static multicast router ports are configured.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

4-247

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Example

The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11

Console(config)#

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports.

Syntax

show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]

vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)

Default Setting

Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Multicast router port types displayed include Static.

Example

The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type

---- ------------------- -------

1 Eth 1/11 Static

2 Eth 1/12 Static

Console#

4-248

IP I

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

IP Interface Commands

An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment.

Table 4-67 IP Interface Commands

Command

ip address

Function Mode Page

Sets the IP address for the current interface IC ip default-gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach other subnetworks

4-249

ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE

PE show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network

NE,

show ip redirects (4-253)

4-252

4-253

ip address

This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use the no form to restore the default IP address.

Syntax

ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}

no ip address

• ip-address - IP address

• netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.

• bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.

• dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.

4-249

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Default Setting

DHCP

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (VLAN)

Command Usage

• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or

DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program.

• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).

• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an

ip dhcp restart command, or by rebooting the switch.

Note: Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address (the default is VLAN 1). This defines the management VLAN, the only

VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch. If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN, the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN.

Example

In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp restart (4-251)

4-250

IP I

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

ip default-gateway

This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the static route.

Syntax

ip default-gateway gateway

no ip default-gateway

gateway - IP address of the default gateway

Default Setting

No static route is established.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment.

Example

The following example defines a default gateway for this device:

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp restart

This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

4-251

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip

address command.

• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.

• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain.

Example

In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp

Console(config-if)#end

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: DHCP.

Console#

Related Commands

ip address (4-249)

show ip interface

This command displays the settings of an IP interface.

Default Setting

All interfaces

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip interface

IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

and address mode: User specified.

Console#

4-252

Related Commands

show ip redirects (4-253)

IP I

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

show ip redirects

This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip redirects

IP default gateway 10.1.0.254

Console#

Related Commands

show ip interface (4-252)

ping

This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.

Syntax

ping host [size size] [count count]

• host - IP address or IP alias of the host.

• size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)

The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information.

• count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)

Default Setting

This command has no default for the host.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

4-253

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Usage

• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.

• Following are some results of the ping command:

- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds, depending on network traffic.

- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout” appears in ten seconds.

- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable.

- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table.

• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.

Example

Console#ping 10.1.0.9

Type ESC to abort.

PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds response time: 10 ms response time: 10 ms response time: 10 ms response time: 10 ms response time: 10 ms

Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:

5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)

Approximate round trip times:

Minimum = 10 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 10 ms

Console#

Related Commands

interface (4-144)

4-254

PPENDIX

OFTWARE

PECIFICATIONS

Software Features

Authentication

Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1X), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security

Access Control Lists

IP, MAC (up to 88 lists)

DHCP Client

Port Configuration

100BASE-TX: 10/100 Mbps, half/full duplex

1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex

Flow Control

Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3-2002

Half Duplex: Back pressure

Broadcast Storm Control

Traffic throttled above a critical threshold

Port Mirroring

One source port, one destination port

Rate Limits

Input Limit

Output limit

Range (configured per port)

Port Trunking

Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)

Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)

A-1

OFTWARE

PECIFICATIONS

Spanning Tree Algorithm

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)

VLAN Support

Up to 255 groups; port-based or tagged (802.1Q),

GVRP for automatic VLAN learning, private VLANs

Class of Service

Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing

(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),

Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Port, IP Precedence, IP DSCP

Multicast Filtering

IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)

Additional Features

BOOTP client

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)

RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)

SMTP Email Alerts

Management Features

In-Band Management

Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell

Out-of-Band Management

RS-232 DB-9 console port

Software Loading

TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band

SNMP

Management access via MIB database

Trap management to specified hosts

A-2

OFTWARE

PECIFICATIONS

RMON

Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)

Standards

IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities

IEEE 802.1p Priority tags

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication

IEEE 802.3-2002

Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet

Full-duplex flow control

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging

DHCP Client (RFC 1541)

HTTPS

IGMP (RFC 1112)

IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)

RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)

RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)

SNMP (RFC 1157)

SNMPv2 (RFC 2571)

SNTP (RFC 2030)

SSH (Version 2.0)

TFTP (RFC 1350)

A-3

OFTWARE

PECIFICATIONS

Management Information Bases

Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)

Entity MIB (RFC 2737)

Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)

Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)

Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)

Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)

IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)

Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)

Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)

IP Multicasting related MIBs

MAU MIB (RFC 2668)

MIB II (RFC 1213)

Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1X)

Port Access Entity Equipment MIB

Private MIB

RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)

RMON MIB (RFC 2819)

RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)

SNMP Community MIB (RFC 2576)

SNMPv2 IP MIB (RFC 2011)

TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB

TCP MIB (RFC 2013)

Trap (RFC 1215)

UDP MIB (RFC 2012)

A-4

PPENDIX

ROUBLESHOOTING

Problems Accessing the Management Interface

Symptom

Cannot connect using

Telnet, web browser, or SNMP software

Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart

Action

• Be sure the switch is powered up.

• Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.

• Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled.

• Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

• Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.

• If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the appropriate tag.

• If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting again at a later time.

B-1

ROUBLESHOOTING

Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart (Continued)

Symptom

Cannot connect using

Secure Shell

Action

• If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting again at a later time.

• Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch, and that the SSH client software is properly configured on the management station.

• Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and exported this key to the SSH client.

• Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each

SSH user, including user name, authentication level, and password.

• Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if public key authentication is used).

Cannot access the on-board configuration program via a serial port connection

Forgot or lost the password

• Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to

VT100 compatible, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and

9600 bps.

• Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out connections provided in the Installation Guide.

• Contact SMC Technical Support for help.

B-2

SING

YSTEM

OGS

Using System Logs

If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused by the switch, follow these steps:

1. Enable logging.

2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.

3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.

4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.

5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault.

Also make a list of any error messages displayed.

6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.

For example:

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#logging history flash 7

Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23

B-3

ROUBLESHOOTING

B-4

LOSSARY

Access Control List (ACL)

ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.

Boot Protocol (BOOTP)

BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files, and the name of the boot file.

Class of Service (CoS)

CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower-level queues.

Priority may be set according to the port default, the packet’s priority bit

(in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or DSCP priority bit.

Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)

DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then into the output queues.

Domain Name Service (DNS)

A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.

Glossary-1

LOSSARY

Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)

Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a

TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.

Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)

EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server (e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication standard.

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)

Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a

Spanning Tree network.

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol.

Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)

GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802.1p standard.

Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)

See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.

Glossary-2

LOSSARY

IEEE 802.1D

Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the Spanning Tree Protocol.

IEEE 802.1Q

VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual

LANs, and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.

IEEE 802.1p

An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.

IEEE 802.1X

Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication.

IEEE 802.3ac

Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.

IEEE 802.3x

Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)

IGMP Snooping

Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between

IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.

Glossary-3

LOSSARY

IGMP Query

On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork.

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)

A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership.

In-Band Management

Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.

IP Multicast Filtering

A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.

IP Precedence

The eight values are mapped one-to-one to the Class of Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications.

Layer 2

Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses.

Glossary-4

LOSSARY

Link Aggregation

See Port Trunk.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with

LACP-configured ports on another device.

Management Information Base (MIB)

An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device.

MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits, also called a message digest.

Multicast Switching

A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group.

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network.

The time servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.

Out-of-Band Management

Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.

Port Authentication

See IEEE 802.1X.

Glossary-5

LOSSARY

Port Mirroring

A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively.

Port Trunk

Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical links.

Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from, uplink ports.

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)

RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.

Remote Monitoring (RMON)

RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions, including specific error types.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

RSTP

reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.

Secure Shell (SSH)

A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch.

Glossary-6

LOSSARY

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services.

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.

Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)

A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network.

Telnet

Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP.

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)

TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer protocol.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)

A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.

Glossary-7

LOSSARY

User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.

Virtual LAN (VLAN)

A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN.

XModem

A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in

128-byte blocks and error-corrected.

Glossary-8

NDEX

Numerics

802.1X, port authentication 3-66

acceptable frame type 3-153

4-202

Access Control List See ACL

ACL

broadcast storm, threshold 3-108

4-150

Class of Service See CoS

CLI, showing commands 4-6

command line interface See CLI

community ports 3-156

community VLANs 3-159

4-210

configuration settings, saving or

restoring 2-11

3-24

console port, required connections 2-2

CoS

layer 3/4 priorities 3-171

traffic class weights 3-170

4-225

default gateway, configuration 3-18

default priority, ingress port 3-165

4-224

default settings, system 1-7

DHCP 3-19

4-249

client 3-17

dynamic configuration 2-8

Differentiated Code Point Service See

DSCP

downloading software 3-22

dynamic addresses, displaying 3-122

DSCP

enabling 3-172

4-233

mapping priorities 3-174

3-178

4-233

firmware

displaying version 3-13

4-84

upgrading 3-22

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See

Index-1

NDEX

GVRP

gateway, default 3-18

interface configuration 3-154

GVRP

global setting 4-217

GVRP, global setting 3-145

4-219

hardware version, displaying 3-13

4-84

HTTPS 3-54

4-42

HTTPS, secure server 3-54

IGMP

groups, displaying 3-186

snooping, configuring 3-181

ingress filtering 3-153

IP address

IP precedence

mapping priorities 3-172

LACP

local parameters 4-172 partner parameters 4-172 protocol message statistics 4-172

logging

to syslog servers 4-61

log-in, web interface 3-3

logon authentication 3-48

logon authentication, sequence 3-51

4-95

4-96

main menu 3-5

Management Information Bases

(MIBs) A-4

mirror port, configuring 3-110

4-157

multicast filtering 3-180

4-238

multicast groups 3-186

4-241 displaying 4-241

multicast services

multicast, static router port 3-185

administrator setting 3-48

4-35

Index-2

NDEX

port authentication 3-66

port priority

configuring 3-165

4-222

default ingress 3-165

4-224

STA 3-135

4-191

port security, configuring 3-64

4-104

port, statistics 3-114

4-153

ports

autonegotiation 3-91

4-146

broadcast storm threshold 3-108

ports, configuring 3-87

4-143

ports, mirroring 3-110

4-157

primary VLAN 3-157

priority, default port ingress 3-165

4-224

private VLANs, configuring 3-156

3-157

4-209

problems, troubleshooting B-1

promiscuous ports 3-156

protocol migration 3-139

4-194

PVLAN

association 3-160

community ports 3-156

interface configuration 3-162

isolated ports 3-156

primary VLAN 3-157

promiscuous ports 3-156

RADIUS, logon authentication 4-97

queue weights 3-170

4-225

rate limits, setting 3-112

4-159

remote logging 4-63

restarting the system 3-41

4-30

RSTP 3-124

4-184

global configuration 3-126

4-184

secure shell 3-57

4-46

Secure Shell configuration 3-57

4-50

4-51

serial port

configuring 4-14

Simple Network Management Protocol See

SNMP

SNMP 3-45 community string 3-45

4-137

enabling traps 3-46

4-141

filtering IP addresses 3-75

trap manager 3-46

4-139

software

displaying version 3-13

4-84

downloading 3-22

Spanning Tree Protocol See STA

specifications, software A-1

SSH, configuring 3-57

global settings, configuring 3-129

4-183

–

4-188

global settings, displaying 3-126

4-195

Index-3

NDEX

interface settings 3-133

path cost method 3-132

4-188

port priority 3-135

4-191

protocol migration 3-139

4-194

transmission limit 3-132

startup files

static addresses, setting 3-121

statistics

system clock, setting 3-42

4-72

System Logs 3-33

system software, downloading from

server 3-22